001-031 linea 1ed gb

234

Upload: others

Post on 03-Feb-2022

7 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB
Page 2: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

Dear Customer,

Thank you for selecting Fiat and congratulations on your choice of a Fiat Linea.

We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your car and use it in the best possible way.

You should read it right through before taking the road for the first time.

You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you derive the maximum from thetechnological features of your Fiat.

You are recommended to read carefully the warnings and indications, marked with the respective symbols:

personal safety;

the car’s wellbeing;

environmental protection.

The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Fiat offers to its Customers:

❒ the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity

❒ the range of additional services available to Fiat Customers.

Best regards and happy motoring!

This Owner Handbook describes all Fiat Linea versions. As a consequence, you should consider only the information which is related to the engine and

bodywork version of the car you purchased.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 1

Page 3: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

MUST BE READ!

K

REFUELLING

petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95 conforming to the European specification EN 228.

Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590.The use of other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently cause lapse of warranty in relation to the damage caused.

ENGINE STARTING

petrol engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral; fully depress the clutchwithout pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVVand release it as soon as the engine has started.

Diesel engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral; fully depress the clutchwithout pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the warning lights Y and mto go off; turn the ignition key to AVVand release it as soon as the engine has started.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

The catalytic converter develops high temperature during operation. Do not park on grass, dry leaves, pine needlesor other flammable material: fire risk .

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The car is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the components correlated with emissions to ensure better respect for the environment.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 2

Page 4: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), visit a Fiat Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car’s electric system can support the required load.

CODE card

Keep it in a safe place, non in the car. Make sure you have the electronic code with you at all times.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE OWNER’S MANUAL CONTAINS…

... important information, advise and warnings for correct use, driving safety and maintenance of your car in time.Pay special attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) ! (car’s wellbeing).

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 3

Page 5: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

4

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

DASHBOARD........................................................................ 5

SYMBOLS ............................................................................... 6

THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM.................................................. 6

THE KEYS .............................................................................. 8

ALARM ................................................................................... 11

IGNITION DEVICE .............................................................. 13

INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................ 14

INSTRUMENTS ..................................................................... 16

DIGITAL DISPLAY ............................................................... 18

MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY ............................................ 23

RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY ....... 32

TRIP COMPUTER ................................................................ 42

FRONT SEATS ..................................................................... 44

REAR SEATS .......................................................................... 45

HEAD RESTRAINTS............................................................. 45

STEERING WHEEL .............................................................. 47

REARVIEW MIRRORS ......................................................... 47

HEATING AND VENTILATION ...................................... 49

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM .................... 53

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ............ 59

EXTERNAL LIGHTS ............................................................ 66

WINDOW WASHING ....................................................... 68

CRUISE CONTROL ............................................................ 70

CEILING LIGHTS .................................................................. 72

CONTROLS........................................................................... 75

FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH .................................................. 77

INTERIOR FITTINGS........................................................... 78

DOORS .................................................................................. 82

POWER WINDOWS........................................................... 83

BOOT ...................................................................................... 86

BONNET................................................................................. 88

ROOF RACK/SKI RACK .................................................... 90

HEADLIGHTS ........................................................................ 91

ABS SYSTEM ......................................................................... 92

ESP SYSTEM .......................................................................... 93

EOBD SYSTEM ..................................................................... 96

PARKING SENSORS ........................................................... 97

SOUND SYSTEM .................................................................. 99

ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER.......... 100

AT THE FILLING STATION ............................................. 101

PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT............................. 102

DDDAASSHHBBOOAARRDD AANNDD CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 4

Page 6: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

5

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSDASHBOARD

The presence and position of the controls, the instruments and the indicators may vary according to the versions.

1. Adjustable side air vents - 2. Fixed side air vents - 3. Left stalk: external lights control - 4. Instrument panel - 5. Right stalk: windscreen wiper controls, trip computer - 6. Controls on dashboard - 7. Adjustable central air vents - 8. Fixed up-per air vent - 9. Front airbag - passenger side - 10. Oddment compartment - 11. Sound system (where provided) - 12. HVACcontrols - 13. Ignition device - 14. Front airbag - driver’s side - 15. Steering wheel adjustment lever - 16. Control panel: foglights/rear fog light/headlight position adjustment/digital display/multifunctional display.

F0R0001m

fig. 1

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 5

Page 7: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

6

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS SYMBOLS

Special coloured labels have been attachednear or actually on some of the compo-nents of your car. These labels bear sym-bols that remind you of the precautionsto be taken as regards that particular com-ponent.

The plate summarising the symbols usedcan be found under the bonnet fig. 1.

THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM

This is an electrical engine locking systemwhich increases protection from at-tempted theft of the car. It is automaticallyactivated when the ignition key is ex-tracted.

Each key contains an electronic devicewhich modulates the signal emitted dur-ing ignition by an antenna incorporated inthe ignition device. This signal is the ‘pass-word’ which changes at each ignition andwhich the control unit uses to recognisethe key and allow ignition.

fig. 1 F0R0002m

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 6

Page 8: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

7

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSIn this case, turn the key to STOP and

then back to MAR; try with the otherkeys provided if the problem persists.Contact a Fiat Dealership if you still can-not start the engine.

IMPORTANT Each key has its own codewhich must be stored by the system ECU.Contact a Fiat Dealership to have newkeys (up to eight) stored.

Warning light Ycoming on when driving

❒ If the warning light Y turns on, thismeans that the system is running a self-test (for example for a voltage drop).

❒ If the warning light Y stays on, con-tact a Fiat Dealership.

The electronic componentsinside the key may be dam-aged if the key is submitted tosharp knocks.

OPERATION

Each time the car is started turning the ig-nition key to MAR, the Fiat CODE sys-tem control unit sends a recognition codeto the engine control unit to deactivatethe inhibitor.

The code is sent only if the Fiat CODEsystem control unit has recognised thecode transmitted from the key.

Each time the ignition key is turned toSTOP, the Fiat CODE system deactivatesthe functions of the engine electronic con-trol unit.

If the code has not been recognised cor-rectly, the warning light Y turns on ac-companied by the related message on thedisplay (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 7

Page 9: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

8

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROLfig. 3

The metal insert A is retractable and it op-erates:

❒ the ignition switch;

❒ the door locks;

❒ the fuel filler lock (where provided).

To extract the metal insert, press buttonB.

THE KEYS

CODE CARD fig. 2(Optional for versions/marketswhere applicable)

The car is delivered with two copies of theignition key and with the CODE cardwhich bears the following:

A the electronic code;

B the mechanical key code to be givento the Fiat Dealership when orderingduplicate keys.

Make sure you have the electronic codeA-fig. 2 with you at all times.

IMPORTANT In order to ensure perfectefficiency of the electronic devices con-tained inside the keys, they should neverbe exposed to direct sunlight.

All the keys and the CODEcard must be handed over tothe new owner when sellingthe car.

fig. 2 F0R0003m fig. 3 F0R0004m

fig. 4 F0R0005m

To refit it proceed as follows:

❒ keep button B pressed and move themetal insert A;

❒ release button B and turn the metal in-sert A until hearing the proper lock-ing click.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 8

Page 10: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

9

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSButton Ë is used for opening the doors

and the tailgate.

Button Á is used for locking the doors andthe tailgate.

Button R (present in some versions on-ly) is used for remote opening of the tail-gate.

The passenger’s compartment lights willcome on for a preset time when the doorsare unlocked.

Only press button B with thekey away from your body,

specifically from your eyes and fromobjects which could get damaged (e.g.your clothes). Do not leave the keyunattended to avoid the button frombeing accidentally pressed while it isbeing handled, e.g. by a child.

WARNING

LED indications on the driver’sdoor fig. 5

When locking the doors, led A switcheson for about 3 seconds and than startsflashing (deterrence function).

If one or more doors or the tailgate arenot closed correctly when the doors arelocked, the led and direction indicatorsstart flashing quickly. The operation willnot be completed.

fig. 5 F0R0006m

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 9

Page 11: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

10

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Replacing the battery of the keywith remote control fig. 6

Battery replacement:

❒ press button A and open the metal in-sert B;

❒ turn the screw C to : using a fine bitscrewdriver;

❒ take out the battery case D and replacethe battery E making sure that the biasis correct;

❒ refit the battery case D inside the keyand lock it turning the screw C to Á

Used batteries are harmful tothe environment. They shouldbe disposed of as specified bylaw in the special containers

provided, or take them to a Fiat Deal-ership, which will deal with their dis-posal.

fig. 6 F0R0007m

Request for additional remotecontrols

The system may recognise up to 8 remotecontrols. Should a new remote control benecessary, contact a Fiat Dealership, tak-ing with you the CODE card, a personalidentity document and the car’s owner-ship documents.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 10

Page 12: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

11

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSHEADLIGHT WASHER

(where provided) fig. 7

The metal insert of the key A is fixed.

The key operates:

❒ the ignition switch;

❒ the door locks;

❒ the fuel filler lock (where provided).fig. 7 F0R0008m

ALARM

The car alarm system is available at Lin-eaccessori Fiat.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 11

Page 13: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

12

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Type

Key without remote control

Key with remote control

Direction indicatorsflashing (only with key with remote control)

Deterrence led

The main functions that can be activated with the keys (with or without remote control) are the following:

Unlocking the doors

Turn key anticlockwise (driver’s side)

Turn key anticlockwise (driver’s side)

Press briefly Ë

blinks twice

Off

Locking the doors from the outside

Turn key clockwise (driver’s side)

Turn key clockwise (driver’s side)

Briefly press Á

blinks once

Steady for approximately 3 seconds and then deterrent blinking

Unlocking thetailgate

Briefly press R

blinks twice

Deterrent blinking

IMPORTANT The windows will be opened when the doors are unlocked; the windows will be closed when the doors arelocked.

Windows down (where provided)

Hold pressed Ë(for longer than 2 seconds)

blinks twice

Off

Windows up (where provided)

Hold pressed button Á(for longer than seconds)

blinks once

Deterrence led blinks

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 12

Page 14: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

13

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSIGNITION

DEVICE

The key can be turned to 3 different po-sitions fig. 8:

❒ STOP: engine off, key extractable,steering locked. Some electrical devices(e.g. sound system, central door lock-ing system, etc.) may work.

❒ MAR: driving position. All electrical de-vices may work.

❒ AVV: engine starting (unstable posi-tion).

The ignition switch is fitted with an elec-tronic safety system that, in the event theengine is not started, turns back the igni-tion key to STOP before repeating thestarting operation.

STEERING COLUMN LOCK

Engaging

When the key is at STOP, remove thekey and turn the steering wheel until itlocks.

Disengaging

Rock the steering wheel slightly as youturn the ignition key to MAR.

If the ignition device is tam-pered with (e.g.: attempted

theft), have it checked over by a FiatDealership as soon as possible.

WARNING

Always remove the key whenyou leave your car to pre-

vent someone from accidentally op-erating the controls. Remember toapply the handbrake. Engage firstgear if the car is parked uphill or re-verse if the car is parked downhill.Never leave children unattended inthe car.

WARNING

fig. 8 F0R0009m

Never extract the key whilethe vehicle is moving. The

steering wheel would be locked assoon as the steering wheel is turned.This also applies to when the car istowed.

WARNING

It is absolutely forbidden tocarry out whatever after-

market operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifica-tions (e.g.: installation of anti-theftdevice) that could badly affect per-formance and safety, cause the lapseof warranty and also result in non-compliance of the car with homolo-gation requirements.

WARNING

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 13

Page 15: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

14

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS INSTRUMENT PANEL

Versions with digital display

A Speedometer (speed indicator)

B Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight

C Engine coolant temperature gauge andexcessive temperature warning light

D Rev counter

E Digital display

Versions with multifunction display

A Speedometer (speed indicator)

B Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight

C Engine coolant temperature gauge andexcessive temperature warning light

D Rev counter

E Multifunction display

F0R0010mfig. 9

F0R0011mfig. 10

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 14

Page 16: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

15

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Versions with reconfigurablemultifunction display

A Speedometer (speed indicator)

B Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight

C Engine coolant temperature gauge andexcessive temperature warning light

D Rev counter

E Reconfigurable multifunction display

F0R0215mfig. 11

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 15

Page 17: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

16

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS INSTRUMENTS

Instrument background colour and typemay vary according to the version.

SPEEDOMETER fig. 12

It shows the car speed.

REV. COUNTER fig. 13

Rev counter shows engine rpm.

IMPORTANT The electronic injectioncontrol system gradually shuts off the flowof fuel when the engine is ‘over-revving’resulting in a gradual loss of engine pow-er.

When the engine is idling, the rev countermay indicate a gradual or sudden increaseof the speed.

This is normal and does not indicate afault. It may be caused, for example, by theoperation of the climate control systemor fan. In these case, a slow change in en-gine speed is used to protect the batterycharge.

fig. 12 F0R0012m fig. 13 F0R0013m

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 16

Page 18: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

17

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

FUEL LEVEL GAUGE fig. 14

This shows the amount of fuel left in thefuel tank.

E empty tank(see “At the filling station”).

F full tank.

The reserve warning light A turns on toindicate that approximately 7 litres of fu-el are left in the tank.

Do not travel with the tank nearly empty:lack of fuel supply could damage the catal-yser.

IMPORTANT The needle will point to Eand warning light A will blink to indicate afault in the system. Go to a Fiat Dealer-ship to have the system checked.

ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE GAUGE fig. 15

This shows the temperature of the enginecoolant fluid and begins working when thefluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.

Under normal conditions, the needleshould hover around the middle of thescale according to the working conditions.

C Low engine coolant temperature.

H High engine coolant temperature.

Warning light B may light up (and a mes-sage on the multifunctional display may ap-pear in certain versions) to indicate thatthe coolant fluid temperature is too high;in this case, stop the engine and contacta Fiat Dealership.

fig. 14 F0R0014m fig. 15 F0R0015m If the needle reaches the redarea, stop the engine imme-diately and contact a FiatDealership.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 17

Page 19: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

18

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS DIGITAL DISPLAY

STANDARD SCREEN fig. 16

The standard screen shows the followingindications:

A Headlight aiming position (only withdipped beam headlights on).

B Clock (always displayed, even with ig-nition key removed and front doorsclosed).

C Odometer (distance covered in kilo-metres or miles) and TRIP data.

Note With key removed (when openingone of the front doors) the display willturn on and show for a few seconds thekm or mi covered.

CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 17

+ To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options upwards or to in-crease the value displayed.

MENUESC

Press briefly to access the menuand/or go to next screen or toconfirm the required menu op-tion.Hold pressed to go back to thestandard screen.

– To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options downwards or to de-crease the displayed value.

Note Buttons + and – activate differentfunctions according to the following situ-ations:

To adjust light inside the passenger compartment

– standard screen, to adjust instrumentpanel brightness, sound system, and auto-matic climate control system.

Setup menu

– to scroll the menu options upwards anddownwards;– to increase or decrease values during set-tings.

fig. 16 F0R0016m fig. 17 F0R0017m

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 18

Page 20: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

19

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSSETUP MENU fig. 18

The menu comprises a series of functionsarranged in a cycle which can be selectedthrough buttons + and – to access the dif-ferent select operations and settings (set-up) given in the following paragraphs.

The setup menu can be activated by press-ing briefly button MENU ESC.

Single presses on buttons + and – willscroll the setup menu options.

Handling modes differ with each other ac-cording to the characteristic of the optionselected.

Selecting a menu option

– press briefly button MENU ESC to se-lect the menu option to set;

– press buttons + and – (by single press-es) to select the new setting;

– press briefly button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and to go back tothe previously selected menu option.

Selecting “Set Clock”

– briefly press button MENU ESC to se-lect the first value to change (hours);

– press buttons + and – (by single press-es) to select the new setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and to go to thenext setup menu option (minutes);

– after setting the values with the sameprocedure, the system will go back to themenu option previously selected.

Hold button MENU ESC pressed– to quit the set up menu if you are in themenu;– to quit the displayed menu if you are set-ting an option;– to save only the settings stored yet (andconfirmed by pressing button MENUESC).

The setup menu displaying is timed; whenquitting the menu due to timing expiry, on-ly settings stored yet by the user (and con-firmed by pressing briefly button MENUESC).

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 19

Page 21: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

20

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Briefly press button MENU ESC to start browsingfrom the standard screen. Press + or – to browse with-in the menu.Note Only the short menu may be accessed for rea-sons of safety while the car is moving (“SPEEd” setting).Stop the car to access the full menu.

fig. 18

F0R2003g

+

+– +

+–

+

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 20

Page 22: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

21

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSSetting the speed limit (SPEEd)

This function may be used to set the carspeed limit (km/h or mph), when this lim-it is exceeded the driver is immediatelyalerted (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).

To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC, themessage (SPEEd) and the previously setunit (km/h) or (mph) will appear on thedisplay;

– press button + or – to activate (on) ordeactivate (OFF) the speed limit function;

– if the function is on, press buttons + or– to select the required speed limit andthen press MENU ESC to confirm;

Note The speed may be set in the rangefrom 30 to 200 km/h, or from 20 to 125mph according to the previously chosenunit (see “Setting the distance unit”) de-scribed below. The setting will in-crease/decrease by five units each timebutton +/– is pressed. Hold button +/–pressed to increase/decrease the settingrapidly. Complete the setting by brieflypressing the button when you approachthe required setting.

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.To cancelthe setting, proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)will blink on the display;

– press button –: (Off) will blink on thedisplay;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Setting the clock (Hour)

This function is used to set the clock.

Proceed as follows:– briefly press button MENU ESC,“hours” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;– briefly press button MENU ESC, “min-utes” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Adjusting the buzzer volume(bUZZ)

This function is used to adjust the buzzervolume used for failure/warning indica-tions and when MENU ESC, + and –buttons are pressed.

To adjust the volume proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC, thedisplay will show the wording (bUZZ);

– press button + or – to select the re-quired volume (volume can be adjusted ac-cording to 8 levels).

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 21

Page 23: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

22

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Front passenger’s airbag

and side bagactivation/deactivation (where provided) (BAG P)

This function is used to activate/deactivatethe front passenger’s airbag.

Proceed as follows:

❒ press button MENU ESC and afterthe message (BAG P OFF) (to deacti-vate) or (BAG P On) (to activate) is dis-played by pressing buttons + or –, pressagain button MENU ESC;

❒ the confirmation request message willbe displayed;

❒ press buttons + or – to select (YES)(confirming activation/deactivation) or(no) (to abort);

❒ briefly press button MENU ESC toconfirm setting e to go back to themenu screen or press the button forlong to go back to the standard screenwithout storing settings.

MENU ESC

MENU ESC

MENU ESC

–+

–+

–+

–+

F0R

1001

g

F0R

1003

g

F0R

1002

gF0

R10

05i

F0R

1006

g

F0R

1002

g

F0R

1003

g

Setting the distance unit (Unit)

With this function it is possible to set theunit.

To set the required unit proceed as fol-lows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC, thedisplay will show the message (Unit) andthe previously set unit (km) or (mi);

– press button + or – to select the re-quired distance unit.

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 22

Page 24: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

23

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 21

+ To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options upwards or to in-crease the value displayed.

MENUESC

Press briefly to access the menuand/or go to next screen or toconfirm the required menu op-tion.Hold pressed to go back to thestandard screen.

– To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options downwards or to de-crease the value displayed.

MULTIFUNCTIONDISPLAY(where provided)

The car can be equipped with the multi-functional display that, according to thesettings made, will show useful informa-tion necessary when driving.

“STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 20The standard screen shows the followinginformation:A Date.B Odometer (covered km or miles).C Clock (always displayed, even with ig-

nition key removed and front doorsclosed).

D External temperature.E Headlight aiming position (only with

dipped beam headlights on).Note When opening one of the frontdoors, the display will turn on and showfor a few seconds the clock and the kilo-metres or miles covered.

fig. 20 F0R0018m

Note Buttons + and – activate differentfunctions according to the following situ-ations:

To adjust light inside the passenger compartment

– standard screen, to adjust instrumentpanel brightness, sound system, and auto-matic climate control system.

Setup menu

– to scroll the menu options upwards anddownwards;– to increase or decrease values during set-tings.

fig. 21 F0R0019m

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 23

Page 25: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

24

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS SETUP MENU fig. 22

The menu comprises a series of functionsarranged in a cycle which can be selectedthrough buttons + and – to access the dif-ferent select operations and settings (set-up) given in the following paragraphs. Asubmenu is provided for some items(Clock and Unit setting).The setup menu can be activated by press-ing briefly button MENU ESC.Single presses on buttons + or – will scrollthe setup menu options.Handling modes differ with each other ac-cording to the characteristic of the optionselected.

Selecting an option of the main menu with-out submenu– press briefly button MENU ESC to se-lect the main menu option to set;– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to select the new setting;– press briefly button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and to go back tothe main menu option previously select-ed.

Selecting “Set Date” and “Set time”:– briefly press button MENU ESC to se-lect the first value to change (e.g. hours/minutes or year / month / day);– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to select the new setting;– briefly press button MENU ESC to storethe new setting and to go to the next set-up menu option, if this is the last one youwill go back to the previously selected op-tion of the main menu.

Hold button MENU ESC pressed:– to quit the set-up menu if you are in themain menu;– to quit the main menu if you are at an-other point of the menu (e.g.: at submenuoption setting level, at submenu level orat main menu option setting level);– to save only the settings stored yet (andconfirmed by pressing button MENUESC).The setup menu environment is timed.Only the changes saved by the user bbriefly pressing MENU ESC will be savedwhen the menu is automatically closed.

Selecting an option of the main menu withsubmenu:– briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-play the first submenu option;– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to scroll all the submenu options;– press briefly button MENU ESC to se-lect the displayed submenu option and toopen the relevant setup menu;– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to select the new setting for this sub-menu option;– briefly press button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and to go back tothe previously selected submenu option.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 24

Page 26: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

25

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Day

Year Month

Türk Nederlands

Español

Português

Français

Italiano

Deutsch Polski

English

Example:

fig. 21

Example:

Briefly press MENU ESC on the standard screen tobrowse. Press + or – to browse within the menu.Note Only the short menu may be accessed for rea-sons of safety while the car is moving (“Speed Beep”setting). Stop the car to access the full menu.

F0R2004g

ESCMENU briefly press

+

EXIT MENU

SPEED BEEP RAIN SENSOR (where provided )

SET TIME

SET DATE

SEE RADIO

AUTOCLOSE

UNIT UNIT LANGUAGE

WARNING VOLUME

BUTTON VOLUME

BELT BUZZER (*)

SERVICE

PASSENGER BAG

(*) This function may only be displayed after the SBR system is deactivated by a Fiat Dealership.

TRIP B DATA

ESCMENUbriefly press HEADLIGHTS

SENSOR (where provided)

+–

+–

+–

+–

+–

+–

+–

+–+

–+

+–

+–

+–

+–

+–

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 25

Page 27: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

26

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)will blink on the display;

– press button –: (Off) will flash on the dis-play;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Rain sensor sensitivity adjustment(Rain sensor) (where provided)

With this function it is possible to adjustthe rain sensor sensitivity according to 4levels.

To set the required sensitivity level pro-ceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC, thepreviously set sensitivity “level” will flashon the display;

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Speed limit (Speed Beep)

This function may be used to set the carspeed limit (km/h or mph); when this lim-it is exceeded the driver is immediatelyalerted (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:– briefly press button MENU ESC, thedisplay will show the wording (SpeedBuzz); – press button + or – to select speed lim-it activation (On) or deactivation (Off);– if the function has been activated (On),press buttons + or – to select the re-quired speed limit and then press MENUESC to confirm.Note The speed may be set in the rangefrom 30 to 200 km/h, or from 20 to 125 mphaccording to the previously chosen unit (see“Setting the distance unit”) described below.The setting will increase/decrease by fiveunits each time button +/– is pressed. Holdbutton +/– pressed to increase/decrease thesetting rapidly. Complete the setting bybriefly pressing the button when you ap-proach the required setting.– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Headlight sensor (Automatic headlight sensorsensitivity adjustment) (where provided)

This function is used to adjust the dusk sensor sensitivity to three levels (level 1 = minimum, level 2 = medium, lev-el 3 = maximum); higher the sensitivity,lower the quantity of external light need-ed to switch the headlights on.

Proceed as follows to set:

– briefly press button MENU ESC, thepreviously set level will flash on the dis-play;

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 26

Page 28: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

27

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSTrip B On/Off (tripB data)

Through this option it is possible to acti-vate (On) or deactivate (Off) the Trip B(partial trip).

For further information see “Trip com-puter”.

Proceed as follows to switch the functionon and off:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-ing to previous setting);

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Setting the clock (Set time)This function allows to set the clock throughtwo sub-menus: “Time” and “Mode”.Proceed as follows:– briefly press button MENU ESC, thedisplay will show the two sub-menus“Time” and “Mode”;– press button + or – to surf the two sub-menus;– select the required option and thenpress button MENU ESCbriefly;– when accessing the “Hour” submenu: –briefly press button MENU ESC,“hours” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;– briefly press button MENU ESC, “min-utes” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;– when accessing the “Format” submenu:briefly press button MENU ESC : thepreviously set display format will flash onthe display;– press button + or – to select “24h” or“12h”.

When you have made the required set-tings, briefly press button MENU ESCto go back to the menu screen or pressthe button for long to go back to the stan-dard screen without storing settings. – hold MENU ESC pressed to go backto the standard screen or main menu ac-cording to the points of the menu whereyou are at.

Set date (Set Date)This function may be used to update thedate (year - month - day).To correct the date proceed as follows:– briefly press button MENU ESC: “day”will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;– briefly press button MENU ESC:“month” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;– briefly press button MENU ESC:“year” will flash on the display;

– press button + or – for setting.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 27

Page 29: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

28

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS – press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Automatic door locking with carrunning (Autoclose)

When activated (On), this function locksautomatically the doors when the carspeed exceeds 20 km/h.

This function is available on all versionsand may only be switched off by meansof the multifunctional display or reconfig-urable multifunctional display.

To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) thisfunction proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-play the three sub-menus;

– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-ing to previous setting);

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC togo back to the menu screen or press the

Note The setting will increase or de-crease by one unit each time + or – ispressed. Hold the button pressed to in-crease/decrease the setting rapidly. Com-plete the setting by briefly pressing thebutton when you approach the requiredsetting.– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Audio repetition (See radio)With this function the display repeats in-formation relevant to the sound system.– Radio: tuned radio station frequency orRDS message, automatic tuning activationor AutoSTore;– CD audio, CD MP3: track number;– CD Changer: CD number and tracknumber;To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off)sound system info displaying proceed asfollows:– briefly press MENU ESC: (On) or (Off)will flash on the display (according to pre-vious setting);

button for long to go back to the stan-dard screen without storing settings.– hold MENU ESC pressed to go backto the standard screen or main menu ac-cording to the points of the menu whereyou are at.

Set units (Unit of measure)

With this function it is possible to set theunits through three sub-menus: “Distances”,“Consumption” and “Temperature”.

Proceed as follows to set the required unit:

– briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-play the three sub-menus;

– press button + or – to surf the three sub-menus;

– select the required sub-menu and thenpress briefly button MENU ESC;

– when accessing the “Distances”submenu:briefly press MENU ESC: either “km” or“mi” will appear on the display (accordingto the previous setting);

– press + or – to make your choice;

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 28

Page 30: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

29

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSSelecting the language (Language)

The messages may be displayed in the fol-lowing languages: Italian, Turkish, Dutch,Portuguese, Polish, French, Spanish, Eng-lish, German.

To set the required language proceed asfollows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set “language” “ will flash on thedisplay;

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

– when you are in the “Consumption” sub-menu: briefly press MENU ESC: either“km/l” or “mpg” will appear on the display(according to the previous setting);

If the distance unit set is “km” the fuel con-sumption unit will be displayed in km.

If the distance unit set is “mi” the fuel con-sumption unit will be displayed in “mpg”.

– press button + or – for setting;

– when accessing the “Temperature”sub-menu: briefly press MENU ESC: either“°C” or “°F” will appear on the display (ac-cording to the previous setting);

– press button + or – for setting;When you have made the required set-tings, briefly press button MENU ESC togo back to the menu screen or press thebutton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings. – hold MENU ESC pressed to go backto the standard screen or main menu ac-cording to the points of the menu whereyou are at.

Adjusting the failure/warningbuzzer volume (Buzzer Volume)

With this function the volume of thebuzzer accompanying any failure/warningindication can be adjusted according to 8levels.

To adjust the volume proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set volume “level” will flash onthe display;

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 29

Page 31: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

30

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Scheduled Servicing (Service)

Through this function it is possible to dis-play information connected to proper carservicing.

Proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: ser-vice in km or mi, according to previoussetting, will be displayed (see paragraph“Units”);

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen.

Note The “Service Schedule” requires thecar to be serviced every 30,000 km (or18,000 mi) or every 20,000 km (whereprovided); this indication will appear au-tomatically with the key at MAR whenthere are 2000 km left (or 1240 mi) andwill be presented automatically every 200km (or 124 mi). The indications will ap-pear more frequently where there are 200km left. The indication will appear in kilo-metres or miles according to the settings.When the next scheduled service opera-tion is approaching, the message “Service”will appear on the display followed by thenumber of kilometres or miles left whenthe key is turned to MAR. Go to a FiatDealership where the “Scheduled Service”operations will be performed and the mes-sage will be reset.

Adjusting the button volume (Button Vol.)

This function may be used to adjust thevolume of the beep accompanying the ac-tivation of buttons MENU ESC, + and– can be adjusted according to 8 levels.

To adjust the volume proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set volume “level” will flash onthe display;

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 30

Page 32: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

31

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSPassenger front and side airbag

activation/deactivation (where provided) (passenger bag)

This function shall be used to activate/de-activate the front passenger’s airbag.

Proceed as follows:

❒ press button MENU ESC and pressMENU ESC again after the message(Bag pass: Off) (to deactivate) or (Bagpass: On) (to activate) is displayed bypressing buttons + and –;

❒ display will show the confirmation mes-sage;

❒ press buttons + or – to select (Yes)(confirming activation/deactivation) or(No) (to abort);

❒ briefly press button MENU ESC toconfirm setting e to go back to themenu screen or press the button forlong to go back to the standard screenwithout storing settings.

MENU ESC

MENU ESC

MENU ESC

–+

–+

–+

–+

–+

–+

F0R

1009

g

F0R

1011

g

F0R

1010

gF0

R10

13g

F0R

1014

g

F0R

1009

g

F0R

1009

g

MENU ESC

F0R

1015

g

F0R

1016

g

Exit Menu

This is the last function that closes the cir-cular setting cycle listed in the initial menuscreen.

Briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the standard screen without stor-ing settings.

Press button – to return to the first menuoption (Speed Beep).

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 31

Page 33: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

32

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS RECONFIGURABLE

MULTIFUNCTIONDISPLAY (where provided)

The car may be equipped with reconfig-urable a multifunctional display that, ac-cording to the settings made, will showuseful driving information.

“STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 23/a

The standard screen shows the followinginformation:

A Time

B Date

C Sport driving mode indication (whereprovided)

D Odometer (distance travelled in kilo-metres/miles)

E Car conditions (e.g. doors open, ice onroad, etc.)

F Headlight aiming position (with dippedbeam headlights on only)

G Outside temperature

When rotating the ignition key to MARposition, the display shows, as mainscreen, the indication of the date fig.23/aor the overpressure of the turbo-charg-er fig.23/b according to the previous se-lection in the menu item “First screen”(“Date” or “Engine Info”).

CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 24

+ To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options upwards or to in-crease the displayed value.

MENU Press briefly to access the menuESC and/or go to next screen or to

confirm the required menu op-tion.Long press to go back to thestandard screen.

– To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options downwards or to de-crease the value displayed.

Note Buttons + and – activate differentfunctions according to the following situ-ations:

– to scroll the menu options upwards anddownwards;

– to increase or decrease values duringsettings.

Note When opening one of the frontdoors, the display will turn on and showfor a few seconds the clock and the km ormi covered.

fig. 24 F0R0019m

fig. 23/a F0R2010g fig. 23/b F0R0241m

032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 32

Page 34: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

33

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSSETUP MENU fig. 25

The menu comprises a series of functionsarranged in a “circular fashion” which canbe selected through buttons + and – toaccess the different select operations andsettings (setup) given in the following para-graphs. A submenu is provided for someitems (Clock and Unit setting).

The setup menu can be activated by press-ing briefly button MENU ESC.

Single presses on buttons + or – will scrollthe setup menu options. Managementmodes differ with each other according tothe characteristic of the option selected.

Selecting an option of the main menu without submenu

– press briefly button MENU ESC to se-lect the main menu option to set;

– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to select the new setting;

– press briefly button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and to go back tothe main menu option previously select-ed.

Selecting an option of the main menu withsubmenu:

– press briefly button MENU ESC to dis-play the first submenu option;

– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to scroll all the submenu options;

– press briefly button MENU ESC to se-lect the displayed submenu option and toopen the relevant setup menu;

– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to select the new setting for this sub-menu option;

– press briefly button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and to go back tothe previously selected submenu option.

032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 33

Page 35: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

34

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Example:

Day

Year Month Türk Nederlands

Español

Português

Français

Polski

Italiano

Deutsch

BELT BUZZER

RAIN SENSOR(where provided)

TRIP B DATA

SET DATE

FIRST PAGE

SEE RADIO

AUTOCLOSEUNIT LANGUAGE

BUZZER VOL.

BUTTON VOL.

MENU ESCbriefly press

MENU ESCbriefly press

fig. 25

SERVICE

F0R2005g

SET TIME

SPEED BEEP

EXIT MENU

PASSENGER BAG

English

On the standard screen, briefly press MENU ESC to start brows-ing. Press + or – to browse within the menu. Note Only the shortmenu may be accessed for reasons of safety while the car is moving(“Brightness” and “Speed Beep”). Stop the car to access the full menu.

HEADLIGHT SENSOR (where provided)

+

+ ++

+

+

+

+

+

+++

+

+

+

+

+

–––

––

––

032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 34

Page 36: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

35

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSNote The speed may be set in the range

from 30 to 200 km/h, or from 20 to 125mph according to the previously chosenunit (see “Setting the distance unit”) de-scribed below. The setting will in-crease/decrease by five units each timebutton +/– is pressed. Hold button +/–pressed to increase/decrease the settingrapidly. Complete the setting by brieflypressing the button when you approachthe required setting.

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)will blink on the display;

– press button –: (Off) will flash on the dis-play;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Speed beep (Speed limit)

This function is used to set the car speedlimit (km/h or mph); when this limit is ex-ceeded the driver is immediately alerted(see section “Warning lights and mes-sages”).

To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC, thedisplay will show the wording (SpeedBuzz);

– press button + or – to select speed lim-it activation (On) or deactivation (Off);

– if the function has been activated (On),press buttons + or – to select the re-quired speed limit and then press MENUESC to confirm.

032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 35

Page 37: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

36

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Rain sensor sensitivity adjustment

(Rain sensor) (where provided)

With this function it is possible to adjustthe rain sensor sensitivity according to 4levels.To set the required sensitivity level pro-ceed as follows:– briefly press button MENU ESC, thepreviously set sensitivity “level” will flashon the display;– press button + or – for setting; – briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Headlight sensor (Automatic headlight sensorsensitivity adjustment) (where provided)

This function is used to adjust the dusksensor sensitivity to three levels (level 1= minimum, level 2 = medium, level 3 =maximum); higher the sensitivity, lowerthe quantity of external light needed toswitch the headlights on. Proceed as fol-lows to set:– briefly press button MENU ESC, thepreviously set level will flash on the dis-play;

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Trip B data (Trip B on)

This function may be used to activate (On)or deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip).

For further information see “Trip com-puter”.

Proceed as follows to switch the functionon and off:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-ing to previous setting);

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Setting the time (Clock)

This function allows to set the clockthrough two sub-menus: “Time” and“Mode”.Proceed as follows:– briefly press button MENU ESC, thedisplay will show the two submenus“Time” and “Mode”;– press button + or – to switch betweenthe two submenus;– select the required option and thenpress button MENU ESCbriefly;- when accessing the “Time” submenu: –briefly press button MENU ESC,“hours” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;– briefly press button MENU ESC, “min-utes” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting.

032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 36

Page 38: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

37

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSNote The setting will increase or de-

crease by one unit each time + or – ispressed. Hold the button pressed to in-crease/decrease the setting rapidly. Com-plete the setting by briefly pressing thebutton when you approach the requiredsetting.– when accessing the “Format” submenu:briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set display format will flash onthe display;– press button + or – to select “24h” or“12h”.

When you have made the required set-tings, briefly press button MENU ESC togo back to the menu screen or press thebutton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

– hold MENU ESC pressed to go backto the standard screen or main menu ac-cording to the points of the menu whereyou are at.

Set date (Set Date)

This function may be used to update thedate (year - month - day).

To correct the date proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC:“year” will flash on the display;

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC:“month” will flash on the display;

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC: “day”will flash on the display;

– press button + or – for setting.

Note The setting will increase or de-crease by one unit each time + or – ispressed. Hold the button pressed to in-crease/decrease the setting rapidly. Com-plete the setting by briefly pressing thebutton when you approach the requiredsetting.

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

First screen (information displayedin the main screen) (where provided)

This function enables to select the type ofinformation displayed in the main screen.It is possible to display the date or thepressure of the turbo-compressor.

To select one of the two items, proceedas follows:

– push the button MENU ESC for ashort time, “First screen” is displayed;

– press again the button MENU ESC fora short time to display the “Date” and“Engine Info” options;

– press + or – to select the type of infor-mation to be displayed in the main screen;

– press MENU ESC for a short time tostore the selection and return to the pre-vious screen or press the button for alonger time to return to the standardscreen without storing the selection.

Rotating the ignition key on MAR, the re-configurable multifunctional display, afterthe start-up check, displays the previous-ly set information using the “First screen”function of the menu.

032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 37

Page 39: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

38

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS See radio

(Repeat audio information)

This function is used to display informa-tion relevant to the sound system.

– Radio: tuned radio station frequency orRDS message, automatic tuning activationor AutoSTore;

– CD audio, CD MP3: track number;

– CD Changer: CD number and tracknumber;

To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off)sound system info displaying proceed asfollows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-ing to previous setting);

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Autoclose (Automatic door lock operationwith car running)

When activated (On), this function locksautomatically the doors when the carspeed exceeds 20 km/h.

This function is available on all versionsand may only be switched off by meansof the multifunctional display or reconfig-urable multifunctional display.

Proceed as follows to switch this functionon or off:

- briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-play a submenu;

– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-ing to previous setting);

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

– hold MENU ESC pressed to go back tothe standard screen or main menu accord-ing to the points of the menu where you areat.

Unit of measure (Set units)

This function may be used to set the unitfor measure in three submenus: “Dis-tances”, “Consumption” and “Tempera-ture”.

Proceed as follows to set the requiredunit:

– briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-play the three sub-menus;

– press button + or – to browse the threesubmenus;

– select the required submenu and thenpress briefly buttonMENU ESC;

– when accessing the “Distance” submenu:briefly press MENU ESC: either “km” or“mi” will appear on the display (accord-ing to the previous setting);

– press button + or – for setting;

– when accessing the “Consumption” sub-menu: briefly press MENU ESC: either“km/l”, “l/100km” or “mpg” will appear onthe display (according to the previous set-ting);

If the distance unit set is “km” the fuel con-sumption unit will be displayed in km/l orl/100km.

032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 38

Page 40: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

39

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSIf the distance unit set is “mi” the fuel con-

sumption unit will be displayed in “mpg”.

– press button + or – for setting;

– when accessing the “Temperature” sub-menu: briefly press MENU ESC: either“°C” or “°F” will appear on the display ac-cording to the previous setting;

– press button + or – for setting;

When you have made the required set-tings, briefly press button MENU ESC togo back to the menu screen or press thebutton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

– hold MENU ESC pressed to go backto the standard screen or main menu ac-cording to the points of the menu whereyou are at.

Language (Selecting the language)

The messages may be displayed in the fol-lowing languages: Italian, German, English, Spanish, French, Portuguese,Dutch.

To set the required language proceed asfollows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set “language” “ will flash on thedisplay;

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Buzzer volume (Adjusting thefailure/warning buzzer volume)

With this function the volume of thebuzzer accompanying any failure/warningindication can be adjusted according to 8levels.

To adjust the volume proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set volume “level” will flash onthe display;

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 39

Page 41: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

40

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Button volume

(Button volume adjustment)

This function may be used to adjust thevolume of the beep accompanying the ac-tivation of buttons MENU ESC, + and– can be adjusted according to 8 levels.

To adjust the volume proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set volume “level” will flash onthe display;

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.

Belt buzzer (Buzzer activation for S.B.R. indication)

This function can be only displayed afterFiat Dealership has deactivated the S.B.R.system (see paragraph “S.B.R. system” insection “Safety devices”).

Service (Scheduled servicing)

This function may be used to display in-formation connected to proper car ser-vicing.

Proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: ser-vice in km or mi, according to previous set-ting, will be displayed (see paragraph“Units”);

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen.

Note The “Service Schedule” requires thecar to be serviced every 30,000 km (or18,000 mi) or every 20,000 km (12,000 mi)(where provided); this indication will ap-pear automatically with the key at MARwhen there are 2000 km left (or equiva-lent distance in miles) and will be pre-sented automatically every 200 km (orequivalent distance in miles). The indica-tions will appear more frequently wherethere are 200 km left. The indication willappear in kilometres or miles according tothe settings. When the next scheduledservice operation is approaching, the mes-sage “Service” will appear on the displayfollowed by the number of kilometres ormiles left when the key is turned to MAR.Go to a Fiat Dealership where the “Sched-uled Service” operations will be per-formed and the message will be reset.

032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 40

Page 42: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

41

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSPassenger bag Front passenger’s

airbag and side bag activation/deactivation (where provided)

This function may be used to activate/de-activate the front passenger’s airbag.

Proceed as follows:

– press MENU ESC and press MENUESC again after displaying the message(Bag pass: Off, to deactivate) or (Bag pass:On, to activate) by means of buttons + and –;

– the confirmation request message willbe displayed;

– press buttons + or – to select (Yes) forconfirming activation/deactivation, or (No)to abort;

– briefly press MENU ESC to confirmsetting e to go back to the menu screenor press the button for long to go back tothe standard screen without storing set-tings.

MENU ESC

F0R

2006

gF0

R20

07g

+–

F0R

2008

g

MENU ESC+–

Exit Menu

This is the last function that closes the cir-cular setting cycle listed in the initial menuscreen.

Briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the standard screen without stor-ing settings.

Press button – to return to the first menuoption (Speed Beep).

032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 41

Page 43: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

42

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS TRIP COMPUTER

General features

The “Trip computer” is used to display in-formation on car operation when the keyis turned to MAR. This function allows todefine two separate trips called “Trip A”and “Trip B” for monitoring the car’s“complete mission” in a reciprocally in-dependent manner.

Both functions are resettable (reset - startof new mission).

“Trip A” may be used to display the fig-ures relating to:

– Range

– Distance travelled

– Average consumption

– Instant consumption

– Average speed

– Travel time (driving time).

“Trip B”, available on multifunctional dis-play only, shall be used to display the fig-ures relating to:

– Trip distance B

– Average consumption B

– Average speed B

– Travel time B (driving time).

Note “Trip B” functions may be exclud-ed (see “Trip B on”). “Range” and “In-stantaneous consumption” cannot be re-set.

Values displayed

Range

This indicates the distance which may betravelled with the fuel in the tank assuming that driving conditions will notchange. The message “——” will appearon the display in the following cases:

– range shorter than 50 km (or 30 mi)

– car left parked with engine running forlong.

Distance travelled

This indicates the distance covered fromthe start of the new mission.

032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 42

Page 44: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

43

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSAverage consumption

This indicates the average consumptionfrom the start of the new mission.

Instant consumption

This indicates the fuel consumption. Thevalue is constantly updated. The message“----” will appear on the display if the car is parked with the engine run-ning.

Average speed

This shows the car average speed as afunction of the overall time elapsed sincethe start of the new mission.

Travel time

This value shows the time elapsed sincethe start of the new mission.

IMPORTANT If information is not avail-able, the message “----” will appear insteadof the Trip Computer values. Displayingof the values will be resumed when nor-mal operation is restored without reset-ting the values displayed before the prob-lem nor starting a new mission.

TRIP button fig. 26Button TRIP, set on the top of the rightsteering column stalk, shall be used (withignition key at MAR) to display and to re-set the previously described values to starta new mission:– briefly press to display the different val-ues– hold pressed to reset and then start anew mission.

New mission

Reset can be:– “manual” resetting by the user, by press-ing the relevant button;– “automatic” resetting, when the “Trip dis-tance” reaches 3999.9 km or 9999.9 km(according to the type of display) or whenthe “Travel time” reaches 99.59 (99 hoursand 59 minutes);

– after disconnecting/reconnecting thebattery.

IMPORTANT The reset operation in thepresence of the screens concerning the“Trip A” makes it possible to reset onlythe information associated with this func-tion.

IMPORTANT The reset operation in thepresence of the screens concerning the“Trip B” makes it possible to reset onlythe information associated with this func-tion.

Start of journey procedure

With ignition key at MAR, press and keepbutton TRIP pressed for over 2 secondsto reset.

Exit Trip

To exit the Trip function: hold MENUESC pressed for longer than 2 seconds.

fig. 26 F0R0020m

032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 43

Page 45: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

44

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

The fabric upholstery of yourcar is designed to withstandthe normal wear and tear ofyour car for a long time. Some

precautions are however needed. Avoidprolonged rubbing against clothing ac-cessories, such as metal buckles, Velcrostrips and the like, which by applying ahigh pressure on the fabric in a smallarea could cause the breakage of somethreads and damage the upholstery.

Seat height adjustment (where provided) fig. 27

Move lever B upwards or downwards toachieve the required height.

IMPORTANT Adjustment must be car-ried out only seated in the relevant seat.

FRONT SEATS

fig. 27 F0R0021m

All adjustments must bemade with the car stationary.

WARNING

Backwards/Forwards adjustmentfig. 27

Lift lever A and push the seat forwardsand backwards: your arms should rest onthe steering wheel rim while you are dri-ving.

After releasing the lever, al-ways check that the seat is

locked on the guides by trying tomove it backwards and forth. If it isnot locked, the seat may move unex-pectedly and make you loose controlof the car.

WARNING

For maximum safety, keepthe back of your seat up-

right, lean back into it and make surethe seat belt fits closely across yourchest and hips.

WARNING

Back rest angle adjustment fig. 27

Turn knob C.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 44

Page 46: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

45

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

fig. 28 F0R0022m

Electric lumbar adjustment (where provided) fig. 28

For electric lumbar adjustment, use con-trols E.

The fabric upholstery of yourcar is designed to withstandthe normal wear and tear ofyour car for a long time.

Some precautions are however need-ed. Avoid prolonged rubbing againstclothing accessories, such as metalbuckles, Velcro strips and the like,which by applying a high pressure onthe fabric in a small area could causethe breakage of some threads anddamage the upholstery.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

FRONT fig. 29

On certain versions head restraints are ad-justable in height and they lock automati-cally in the required position.

To adjust head restraints proceed as fol-lows:

❒ upward adjustment: raise the head re-straint until you hear it click.

REAR SEATS

To folds the rear seats refer to paragraph“Extending the boot” in this section.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 45

Page 47: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

46

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

❒ downward adjustment: press A andlower the head restraint.

To lift out front head restraints: press atthe same time buttons A and B set onboth sides and take them out.

REAR (where provided) fig. 30

To use the head restraint, raise it until hear-ing the click (position of use).

To bring it back to the original position(position of non use), press button A andpush the head restraint down into theback rest.

fig. 29 F0R0024m fig. 30 F0R0025m

To optimise head restraint protective ac-tion, adjust the seat back upright and keepyour head as close as possible to the headrestraint.

The head restraints must beadjusted so that they sup-

port your neck and not your head.Only in this way may they performtheir protective action.

WARNING

To lift out rear head restraints: press atthe same time buttons A and B set onboth sides and take them out.

IMPORTANT Rear seat passengers shallalways set the head restraints in the po-sition of use.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 46

Page 48: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

47

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSREARVIEW MIRRORS

DRIVING MIRROR fig. 32

The mirror is fitted with a safety devicethat causes it to be released in the eventof a violent crash.

STEERING WHEEL

The driver can adjust the steering wheelposition both axially and in height.

Proceed as follows:

❒ release the lever A-fig. 31 pushing itforwards (position 2);

❒ adjust the steering wheel as required;

❒ lock the lever A pulling it towards thesteering wheel (position 1).

fig. 31 F0R0026m

Any adjustment of the steer-ing wheel position must be

carried out only with the car station-ary and the engine turned off.

WARNING

It is absolutely forbidden tocarry out whatever after-

market operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifica-tions (e.g.: installation of anti-theftdevice) that could badly affect per-formance and safety, cause the lapseof warranty and also result in non-compliance of the car with homolo-gation requirements.

WARNING

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 47

Page 49: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

48

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

DOOR MIRRORS

Electrical adjustment fig. 33

This operation is only possible with igni-tion key at MAR.

Proceed as follows:

❒ use switch B to select the mirror re-quired (left or right);

❒ to adjust the mirror move the switchC in the four directions;

Folding

When required (for example when themirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)it is possible to fold the mirror moving itfrom position 1-fig. 34 to position 2.

fig. 32 F0R0027m

fig. 33 F0R0028m

The mirror can be adjusted to two differ-ent positions (normal or antiglare) bymeans of the lever A.

Some versions fit an electrochromic mir-ror. Button ON/OFF on the lower partof the window is used to switch the elec-trochromic function on and off. Switch onto shade the mirror for daytime use.

When driving the mirrors shallalways be in position 1-fig. 34.

As the driver’s door mirror iscurved, it may slightly alter the

perception of distance.

WARNING

fig. 34 F0R0029m fig. 35 F0R0030m

Manual adjustment fig. 35

Use knob A-fig. 35 to adjust manually.

Demisting/defrosting (where provided)

Mirrors are fitted with resistors that willactivate when turning the heated rear win-dow on (by pressing button ().

IMPORTANT This function is timed andit will turn off automatically a few minuteslater.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 48

Page 50: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

49

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

fig. 36

F0R0031m

HEATING AND VENTILATION

1. Upper fixed vent - 2. Adjustable central vents - 3. Fixed side vent - 4. Adjustable side vents - 5. Lower vents for front seats - 6. Lower side vents for rear seats - 7. Lower central vent for rear seats (where provided).

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 49

Page 51: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

50

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

CONTROLS fig. 39

Air temperature knob A(mixing hot and cold air)

Red section = hot air

Blue section = cold air

Fan on/off and speed adjustmentknob B

p 0 = fan off

1-2-3 = ventilation speed

4 - = maximum fan speed

fig. 39 F0R0034m

fig. 37 F0R0032m

fig. 38 F0R0033m

ADJUSTABLE SIDE ANDCENTRAL VENTS fig. 37-38

A Fixed vent for side windows.

B Adjustable side vents.

C Adjustable central vents.

Vents A are fixed.

To use vents B and C, operate the rele-vant device to turn them as required.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 50

Page 52: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

51

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSAir distribution knob C

¶ to convey air to the central and sidevents;

ß to warm the feet and convey coolerair to the dashboard vents, in inter-mediate temperature conditions;

© for heating when the outside temper-ature is very cold: for maximum airflow to feet;

® to warm the feet and demist the wind-screen at the same time;

- for quick windscreen demisting.

Air recirculation on/off slider D

Take the slider to position v to re-circulate internal air.

Take the slider to position ¶ to switchinternal air recirculation off.

FAST HEATING

For fast heating of the passenger com-partment, proceed as follows:

❒ turn knob A to the red sector;

❒ switch internal air recirculation on;

❒ turn knob C to ¶;

❒ knob B turned to 4 - (max. fanspeed).

Then use the controls to keep the re-quired comfort conditions and press but-ton D to ¶ to turn air recirculation off(button led off) and to prevent misting up.

IMPORTANT With cold engine, you haveto wait for a few minutes to let the sys-tem fluid reach the operating temperature.

VENTILATION

To ventilate the passenger’s compartmentproperly proceed as follows:

❒ knob A turned to blue section;

❒ switch internal air recirculation off;

❒ turn knob C to ¶;

❒ turn knob B to required speed.

WARMING THE PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT

Proceed as follows:

❒ turn knob A to the red sector;

❒ turn knob C to the required position;

❒ turn knob B to required speed.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 51

Page 53: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

52

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS FRONT WINDOW FAST

DEMISTING/DEFROSTING (WINDSCREENAND SIDE WINDOWS)

Proceed as follows:

❒ turn knob A to the red sector;

❒ switch internal air recirculation off;

❒ turn knob C to -;

❒ knob B turned to 4 - (max. fanspeed).

After demisting/defrosting, operate thecontrols to restore the required comfort.

Window demisting

In the event of considerable outside mois-ture and/or rain and/or considerable dif-ferences in temperature inside and outsidethe passenger compartment, perform thefollowing preventive demisting procedure:

❒ turn knob A to the red sector;

❒ switch internal air recirculation off;

❒ turn knob C to -. Change it to posi-tion con ® if demisting is insufficient;

❒ turn knob B to 2nd speed. HEATED REAR WINDOW AND DOOR MIRRORDEMISTING/DEFROSTING (where provided) fig. 40

Press button A to start this function;when this function is on the button led ison.

This function is timed and it will turn offautomatically after 20 minutes. Press Aagain to switch it off before.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers onthe inside of the rear window over theheating filaments to avoid damage thatmight cause it to stop working properly.

fig. 40 F0R0035m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 52

Page 54: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

53

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSMANUAL CLIMATE

CONTROL SYSTEM (where provided)

CONTROLS fig. 41

Air temperature knob A (mixing hot and cold air)

Red section = hot air

Blue section = cold air

Fan activation /speed adjustmentknob B

p 0 = fan off

1-2-3 = ventilation speed

4 - = maximum fan speed

INTERNAL AIRRECIRCULATION

Move slider D to position v to switchinternal air recirculation on.

It is advisable to switch internal air recir-culation on while standing in queues or intunnels to prevent the introduction of pol-luted air. Do not use the function for along time, particularly if there are manyoccupants on board, to prevent the win-dows from misting up.

IMPORTANT The inside air recirculationsystem makes it possible to reach the re-quired “heating” or “cooling” conditionsfaster.

Do not use the air recirculation functionon rainy/cold days as it would consider-ably increase the possibility of the win-dows misting up.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 53

Page 55: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

54

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Air distribution knob C

¶ to convey air to the central and sidevents;

ß to warm the feet and convey coolerair to the dashboard vents, in inter-mediate temperature conditions;

© for heating when the outside temper-ature is very cold: for maximum airflow to feet;

Air recirculation on/off slider D

Take the slider to position v to recir-culate internal air.

Take the slider to position ¶to switchinternal air recirculation off.

Switching the climate controlsystem on and off

Press knob E- fig. 41 (LED on knob willlight up) to switch the climate control sys-tem on.

Press knob E again (LED on knob will gooff) to switch the climate control systemoff.

fig. 41 F0R0036m

® to warm the feet and at the same timedemist the windscreen;

- for quick windscreen demisting.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 54

Page 56: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

55

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSVENTILATION

To ventilate the passenger’s compartmentproperly proceed as follows:

❒ knob A turned to blue section;

❒ switch internal air recirculation off;

❒ turn knob C to ¶;

❒ turn knob B to required speed.

CLIMATE CONTROL (cooling)

For fast cooling of the passenger com-partment, proceed as follows:

❒ knob A turned to blue section;

❒ switch internal air recirculation on;

❒ turn knob C to ¶;

❒ switch the climate control system onby pressing knob E: the LED on theknob will light up;

❒ turn knob B to 4- (maximum speedof fan).

Cooling adjustment

❒ turn knob A rightwards to increase thetemperature;

❒ switch internal air recirculation off;

❒ turn knob B to increase fan speed.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 55

Page 57: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

56

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS WARMING THE PASSENGER

COMPARTMENT

Proceed as follows:

❒ turn knob A to the red sector;

❒ turn knob C to the required symbol;

❒ turn knob B to required speed.

FAST HEATING

For fast heating of the passenger com-partment, proceed as follows:

❒ turn knob A to the red sector;

❒ switch internal air recirculation on;

❒ turn knob C to ©;

❒ knob B turned to 4 - (max. fanspeed).

Then adjust the controls to obtain the re-quired conditions of comfort and switchinternal air recirculation off.

IMPORTANT With cold engine, you haveto wait for a few minutes to let the sys-tem fluid reach the operating temperature.

FRONT WINDOW FASTDEMISTING/DEFROSTING(WINDSCREEN AND SIDEWINDOWS)

Proceed as follows:

❒ turn knob A to the red sector;

❒ turn knob B to 4 - (maximum fanspeed);

❒ turn knob C to -;

❒ switch internal air recirculation off.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 56

Page 58: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

57

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSWindow demisting

In the event of considerable outside mois-ture and/or rain and/or considerable dif-ferences in temperature inside and outsidethe passenger compartment, perform thefollowing preventive demisting procedure:

❒ turn knob A to the red sector;

❒ switch internal air recirculation off;

❒ turn knob C to - and change it backto ® if demisting does not improve;

❒ turn knob B to 2nd speed.

IMPORTANT The climate control systemis very useful to prevent window mistingup in presence of high humidity since itdries the air.

HEATED REAR WINDOW AND DOOR MIRROR DEMISTING/DEFROSTING (where provided)fig. 42

Press button A to start this function;when this function is on the button led ison.

This function is timed and it will turn offautomatically after 20 minutes. Press Aagain to switch it off before.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers onthe inside of the rear window over theheating filaments to avoid damage thatmight cause it to stop working properly.

fig. 42 F0R0035m

After demisting/defrosting, operate thecontrols to restore the required comfort.

IMPORTANT The climate control systemis very useful for faster demisting becauseit dries the air. Adjust the controls as de-scribed above and press knob E to switchthe climate control system on: the LED onthe knob will light up.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 57

Page 59: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

58

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS LOOKING AFTER THE SYSTEM

Run the climate control system for at least10 minutes every month during the win-ter. Have the system inspected at a FiatDealership before the summer.

The system uses R134a re-frigerant fluid which does notharm the environment in theevent of accidental leakage.

Never use R12 fluid which is not com-patible with the system components.

IMPORTANT The inside air recirculationsystem makes it possible to reach the re-quired “heating” or “cooling” conditionsfaster.

Do not use the air recirculation functionon rainy/cold days as it would consider-ably increase the possibility of the win-dows misting inside.

AIR RECIRCULATION

Move slider D to position v to switchinternal air recirculation on.

It is advisable to switch internal air recir-culation on while standing in queues or intunnels to prevent the introduction of pol-luted air. Do not use the function for along time, particularly if there are manyoccupants on board, to prevent the win-dows from misting up.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 58

Page 60: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

59

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSAUTOMATIC CLIMATE

CONTROL SYSTEM (where provided)

GENERAL

The automatic climate control system ad-justs the temperature, the quantity and thedistribution of the air in the passengercompartment. Temperature is controlledon the basis of an “equivalent tempera-ture” principle; in other words, the sys-tem continuously works to keep the com-fort level inside the car constant and tocompensate for possible variations of ex-ternal conditions, including sun radiationdetected by a specific sensor.

The automatically controlled parametersand functions are:

❒ air temperature at the vents;

❒ air distribution at the vents;

❒ fan speed (continuous air flow varia-tion);

❒ compressor fan on (for cooling/dehu-midifying the air);

❒ air recirculation.

All functions may be manually changed. Inorder words, you may select one or morefunctions and change the parameters asrequired. Automatic control of the man-ually changed functions will be suspended:the system will change override your set-tings only for safety related reasons (e.g.risk of misting up).

Manual selections will always have higherpriority over automatic settings and willbe stored until the user switches the sys-tem back to automatic control by press-ing AUTO expect for the cases in whichthe system will intervene for particular,safety-related reasons.

You can adjust one function automatical-ly and have the automatic system controlall the others.

The air temperature is always automati-cally controlled according to the temper-ature shown on the display (except forwhen the system is off or in certain con-ditions when the compressor is not run-ning).

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 59

Page 61: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

60

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS The following parameters and functions

can be set or changed manually:

❒ air temperature;

❒ fan speed (continuous variation);

❒ air distribution setting to seven posi-tions;

❒ compressor enabling;

❒ fast defrosting/demisting;

❒ air recirculation;

❒ system off.

F Compressor enabling button.

G Air recirculation button.

H Fan speed buttons.

I Temperature adjustment knob.

fig. 43 F0R0148m

CONTROLS fig. 43

A AUTO button: automatic control ofall functions.

B Air distribution selection buttons.

C Display.

D MAX DEF function button.

E System off button.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 60

Page 62: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

61

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSUSING THE CLIMATE

CONTROL SYSTEM

The system can be started in differentways, but it is advisable to start by press-ing the AUTO button and then turningthe knobs to set the temperature requiredon the display.

The system will start running automaticallyin this way and the set comfortable tem-perature will be reached as quickly as pos-sible. The system will adjust the temper-ature, the quantity and the distribution ofthe air introduced into the passenger com-partment and will manage the recircula-tion function and the compressor.

Manual intervention is only required forthe following functions during fully auto-matic operation.

❒ T air recirculation, to keep thefunction always either on or off;

❒ Z to speed up demisting/defrosting ofwindscreen, rear window and exter-nal rearview mirrors;

During completely automatic system op-eration, you can vary the set temperature,the air distribution and the fan speed us-ing the corresponding buttons or knobsat any time: the system will automaticallychange settings to adapt to the new re-quest.

During fully automatic operation (FULLAUTO), the word FULL will disappearif the air distribution, air speed, compres-sor and/or recirculation settings arechanged. In this way, the functions willswitch from automatic to manual controluntil AUTO is pressed again. With on ormore manually set functions, the intro-duced air temperature is still managed au-tomatically by the system, except for whenthe compressor is off: in the case, the airintroduced into the passenger compart-ment cannot be cooler than the outsideair.

Air temperature adjustmentknob (I)

Turn the knob either clockwise or anti-clockwise to increase or lower the re-quested temperature in the passengercompartment. The set temperature isshown on the display.

Turn the knob either all to the right orall to the left to the extreme HI or LOposition to use the maximum heating ormaximum cooling functions:

❒ HI function (maximum heating):

select by turning the temperature knobclockwise over the maximum value (32 °C).

This function may be used to heat up thepassenger compartment exploiting thesystem potential to the maximum. In thiscondition, the system stop controllingtemperature automatically and sets airmixing to maximum heating. The air speedand distribution are fixed.

Specifically, if the heating fluid is not suffi-ciently warm, the fan will not start up atthe maximum speed immediately to limitintroducing excessively cool air into thepassenger compartment.

All manual settings will be allowed whenthis function is on.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 61

Page 63: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

62

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS To switch the function off, simply turn the

temperature knob anticlockwise and setthe required temperature.

❒ LO function (maximum cooling):

select by turning the temperature knobanticlockwise under the minimum value(16 °C).

This function may be used to cool downthe passenger compartment exploiting thesystem potential to the maximum. In thiscondition, the system stop controllingtemperature automatically and sets airmixing to maximum cooling. The air speedand distribution are fixed. All manual set-tings will be allowed when this functionis on.

To switch the function off, simply turn thetemperature knob anticlockwise and setthe required temperature.

Air distribution buttons (B)

Press these buttons to manually set oneof the seven air distribution settings:

▲ Air flow to the windscreen and frontside window vents to demist or de-frost them.

˙ Air flow at central and side dashboardvents to ventilate the chest and theface during the hot season.

▼ Air flow to the front and rear foot wellvents. Thanks to the natural tenden-cy of hot air to spread upwards, thisdistribution pattern allows to warmthe passenger compartment up asquickly as possible, providing an im-mediate feeling of warmth.

˙▼

Air flow distributed between foot wellvents (hotter air) and central and sidedashboard vents (cooler air). This dis-tribution is particularly useful in springand autumn on a sunny day.

▲▼

Air flow distributed between foot wellvents and windscreen and front sidewindow defrosting/demisting vents.This allows an adequate warming ofthe passenger compartment and pre-vents the windows from misting up.

▲˙

Air flow distributed between wind-screen and front side window de-froster/demister and central and sidedashboard vents. This distribution al-lows to maintain good levels of com-fort and the passenger compartmentadequately cool (summer).

▲˙▼

Air flow distributed between wind-screen and front side window de-froster/demister and central and sidedashboard vents. This distribution al-lows adequate air diffusion and main-tains a good level of comfort both insummer and winter.

The set distribution is shown by the cor-responding LEDs on the selected buttons.

To restore automatic air distribution con-trol after a manual adjustment, press but-ton AUTO.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 62

Page 64: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

63

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSFan speed adjusting buttons (H)

Press button H to increase or to decreasethe fan speed and therefore the amountof air admitted into the passenger com-partment, although keeping the requiredtemperature set.

The fan speed is shown by the lit bars onthe display:

❒ max fan speed = all bars lit;

❒ min fan speed = one bar lit.

The fan can be cut off only if the climatecontrol compressor has been switched off pressing button F-fig. 40.

IMPORTANT To restore automatic fanspeed control after a manual adjustment,press button AUTO.

IMPORTANT At high speeds, the dynamiceffect may increase the flow of air into thepassenger compartment which in this casewill not directly correspond to the fanspeed bar display.

AUTO (A) (automatic operation)

Press AUTO to make the system auto-matically adjust the quantity and distribu-tion of the air introduced into the pas-senger compartment. All previous manu-al settings will be cancelled.

The message FULL AUTO will appearon the front display in this condition.

By manually intervening on at least of thefunctions automatically managed by thesystem (air recirculation, fan speed orcompressor on/off), the word FULL willdisappear from the display indicating thatthe system is no longer automatically con-trolling all the functions (the temperaturewill still be controlled automatically by thesystem).

IMPORTANT Should the system (aftermanual settings) be no longer able toguarantee the required temperature setin the passenger compartment, the settemperature value will start flashing to in-dicate this condition, after one minute theAUTO message will turn off.

To restore system automatic control atany time, after one or more manual ad-justments, press button AUTO.

Air recirculation on/off button (G)

Air recirculation works according to thefollowing operating logics:

❒ override on (inside air recirculationalways on), indicated by the the LEDon button G and symbol T onthe display;

❒ override off (air recirculation alwaysoff and introduction of external air),indicated by the fact that the LED onthe button is off êis on the display.

These operating conditions are obtainedby pressing G in sequence.

IMPORTANT The inside air recircula-tion system makes it possible to reachthe required heating or cooling condi-tions faster.

It is however inadvisable to use it onrainy/cold days as it would considerablyincrease the possibility of the windowsmisting inside, especially if the climatecontrol compressor is off.

Recirculation is forced off (i.e. air isintroduced from the outside) when thethe outside temperature is cold to pre-vent misting up.

It is advisable not to use the air recircu-lation function when the outside tem-perature is low to prevent the windowsfrom rapidly misting up.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 63

Page 65: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

64

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Climate control compressor

enabling button (F)

Press √ to switch the climate controlcompressor off (if on). The icon on thedisplay will go out.Press the button when the LED is off torestore automatically system controland use of the compressor. The iconwill light up on the display in this case.

The system will switch recirculation offwhen the compressor is switched off toprevent misting up. Although the systemis capable of maintaining the required tem-perature, the word FULL will disappearfrom the display. If on the other hand thesystem cannot maintain the required tem-perature, the digits will blink and the wordAUTO will disappear.

IMPORTANT With the compressor off,it is not possible to introduced air coolerthan ambient temperature into the pas-senger compartment. Furthermore, incertain conditions, the windows couldmist up rapidly because the air is not de-humidified.The switching off of the climatecontrol compressor remains in storageeven when the engine has been stopped.

To restore automatic compressor control,press √ again (in this case, the system willonly work as a heater) or press AUTO.

With climate control compressor off, thefan speed can be set to zero manually (nobar shown).

With the compressor enabled and the en-gine started, the fan speed may be reducedto the minimum setting (only one barshown).

Fast window demisting/defrosting button (D)

Press this button: the climate control sys-tem will automatically switch on all thefunctions required for fast windscreen andfront side window demisting/defrosting,that is:

❒ switches on climate control compres-sor when climatic conditions are suit-able;

❒ air recirculation off;

❒ maximum air temperature HI on bothareas;

❒ operates proper fan speed accordingto engine coolant temperature to lim-it the flow into the passenger com-partment of air not warm enough todemist the windows;

❒ directs air flow to windscreen andfront side windows vents;

❒ heated rear window on.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 64

Page 66: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

65

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSIMPORTANT The quick demisting/de-

frosting function will stay on for approxi-mately 3 minutes after the engine coolanttemperature is warm enough to ensurerapid window demisting.

When the function is on, the LED on therear window demister button will light upand the message FULL AUTO will goout on the display.

You may only adjust the fan speed andswitch the rear window demister off man-ually when this function is running.

To restore running operations before thisfunction was activated, press either but-ton B, air recirculation button G, com-pressor button F or button AUTO A.

Switching the system off (E)

Press E to switch the climate control sys-tem off. The display will go out as a con-sequence.

The following climate control conditionswill be established when the system is off:

❒ display off;

❒ temperature not shown;

❒ air recirculation on, passenger com-partment isolated from the outside(recirculation LED on);

❒ climate control compressor off;

❒ fan off.

Press AUTO to switch the automatic cli-mate control system back on.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 65

Page 67: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

66

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS EXTERNAL LIGHTS

The left-hand stalk fig. 44/a operatesmost of the external lights.

The external lights can only be switchedon when the ignition key is at MAR.

The instrument panel and the variousdashboard controls will come on with theexternal lights.

LIGHTS OFF

Knurled ring turned to symbol O.

SIDELIGHTS - TAILLIGHTS

Turn the knurled ring to 6.

The warning light 3 on the instrumentcluster will come on at the same time.

DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS

Turn the knurled ring to 2.

The warning light 3 on the instrumentcluster will come on at the same time.

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

When the knurled ring is at 2, pull thelever towards the steering wheel (2nd un-stable position).

The warning light 1 1on the instrumentcluster will come on at the same time.

To turn the main beams off, pull again thelever towards the steering wheel (dippedbeams will turn on again).

FLASHING THE HEADLIGHTS

Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel(1st unstable position) regardless of the po-sition of the knurled ring. The warninglight 1 on the instrument cluster willcome on at the same time.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTSENSOR (day light sensor) fig. 44/b (where provided)

This sensor detects changes of externallights according to the sensitivity of thesetting: higher the sensitivity, lower theamount of external light needed to switchthe lights on. The sensitivity of the day lightsensor may be adjusted by means of the“Setup menu” on the instrument panel.

Activation

Turn the knurled ring to 2A . the side/tail-lights and dipped beam headlights areswitched on automatically according tothe external light.

The headlights can only be flashed with thesensor on.

fig. 44/a F0R0037m fig. 44/b F0R0238m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 66

Page 68: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

67

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSDeactivation

The main beam headlights will go out fol-lowed after approximately 10 seconds bythe side/taillights when the sensor is de-activated.

The sensor cannot detect the presence offog: switch the lights on manually in thiscase.

DIRECTION INDICATORS fig. 45

Push the stalk to (stable) position:

❒ up (position 1): right-hand indicator;

❒ down (position 2): left-hand indicator;

Warning light Î or ¥will blink on the in-strument panel.

Indicators are switched off automaticallywhen the steering wheel is straightened.

If you want the indicator to flash briefly toshow that you are about to change lane,move the stalk up or down without click-ing into position (unstable position). Whenreleased the stalk will return to its homeposition.

“FOLLOW ME HOME” DEVICE

This function allows the illumination of thespace in front of the car for a preset pe-riod of time.

Activation

With the ignition key at STOP or re-moved, pull the left-hand stalk towards thesteering wheel within 2 minutes fromwhen the engine is turned off.

At each single movement of the stalk, thelights will remain on for an extra 30 sec-onds up to a maximum of 210 seconds;then the lights are switched off automati-cally.

Warning light 3 on the instrument pan-el will light up and the corresponding mes-sage will appear on the display (see“Warning lights and messages”) as long asthe function is on. The warning light willgo out when the lever is operate and stayon until the function is automatically de-activated. Time for which the lights stayon can only be increased by operating thelever.

Deactivation

Keep the stalk pulled towards the steer-ing wheel for more than 2 seconds.

fig. 45 F0R0038m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 67

Page 69: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

68

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS WINDOW WASHING

The right stalk fig. 46 controls windscreenwiper/washer operation.

WINDSCREEN WASHER/WIPER

The device can only work when the igni-tion key is at MAR.

The stalk ring nut can be moved to fourdifferent positions:O windscreen wiper off;

≤ intermittent;

≥ continuous slow;

¥ continuous fast.

Move the lever to position A (unstable)to limit operation for the time for whichthe lever is held in this position. The leverwill return to position and the wiper willbe automatically stopped when released.

Do not use the windscreenwiper to remove layers ofsnow or ice from the wind-screen. In such conditions, the

windscreen wiper may be subjected toexcessive stress and the motor protec-tion which prevents operation for a fewseconds may trip. If operation is not re-stored, even after turning the key andrestarting the engine, go to a Fiat Deal-ership.

With the ring in position ≤ the wind-screen wiper will automatically adapt tothe speed of the car.

IMPORTANT Replace wiper blades asspecified in section “Car maintenance”.

fig. 46 F0R0039m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 68

Page 70: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

69

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSRAIN SENSOR

(where provided)

The rain sensor is located behind the dri-ving mirror in contact with the windscreenand has the purpose of automatically ad-just, during the intermittent operation, thefrequency of the windscreen wiperstrokes as to the rain intensity.

IMPORTANT Keep clean the glass in thesensor area.

Activation

Move the right-hand stalk knurled ring to≤ fig. 46.

The activation of the rain sensor is sig-nalled by a control acquisition “stroke”.

Through the set up menu it is possible toincrease the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

The increase of the sensitivity of the rainsensor is signalled by a control and acqui-sition “stroke”.

Operating the windscreen washer withthe rain sensor activated the normal wash-ing cycle is performed at the end of whichthe rain sensor resumes its normal auto-matic function.

Deactivation

Change the stalk knurled ring positionfrom ≤ fig. 46 or turn the ignition keyto STOP.

At the next start-up (key at MAR), thesensor will not be reactivated even if theknurled ring is at ≤ fig. 46. To reacti-vate the sensor, move the ring from po-sition ≤ to any other position and thenreturn it to position ≤.

Rain sensor activation will be indicated byat least one wiper “stroke” even if thewindscreen is dry.

The rain sensor is able to recognize andautomatically adjust itself in the presenceof the following particular conditions:

❒ presence of dirt on the controlled sur-face (salt, dirt, etc.);

❒ difference between day and night.

IMPORTANT Streaks of water may causeunnecessary blade moving.

“Smart washing” function

Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel(unstable position) to operate the wind-screen washer.

Keeping the stalk pulled for more than halfa second, with just one movement it ispossible to operate the washer jet and thewiper at the same time.

The wiper stops working three strokes af-ter releasing the stalk.

A further stroke after 6 seconds com-pletes the wiping operation.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 69

Page 71: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

70

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS CRUISE CONTROL

(constant speedregulator)(where provided)

It is a device able to support the driver,with electronic control, which allows dri-ving at speed over 30 km/h on long andstraight dry roads (e.g.: motorways), at adesired speed, without pressing the ac-celerator pedal. Therefore it is not sug-gested to use this device on extra-urbanroads with traffic. Do not use it in town.

SWITCHING THE DEVICE ON

Turn knob A-fig. 47 to ON.

The Cruise Control cannot be engagedin first or reverse gear. It is advisable toengage it in 4th or higher gears.

Travelling downhill with the device en-gaged, the car speed may increase morethan the memorised one.

When the device is activated the warn-ing light Ü turns on together with the rel-evant message on the instrument panel(where provided).

STORING THE CAR SPEED

Proceed as follows:

❒ turn knob A-fig. 47 to ON and pressthe accelerator pedal to the requiredspeed;

❒ push the lever up (+) for at least onesecond and release it: the car speed willbe stored. The accelerator pedal maybe released.

If needed (e.g. for overtaking), press theaccelerator pedal to accelerate: the carwill return to the previously set speedwhen the pedal is released.

fig. 47 F0R0041m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 70

Page 72: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

71

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSRESTORING STORED SPEED

If the device has been disengaged for ex-ample pressing the brake or clutch pedal,the memorised speed can be reset as fol-lows:

❒ accelerate gradually until reaching aspeed approaching the one stored;

❒ engage the gear selected at the timewhen the speed was originally stored;

❒ press RES B-fig. 47.

INCREASING THE STOREDSPEED

The stored speed can be increased in twoways:

❒ by pressing the accelerator and thenstoring the new speed reached;

or

❒ by moving the stalk upwards (+).

Each operation of the stalk will corre-spond to a slight increase in speed (about1 km/h), while keeping the stalk upwardswill correspond to a continuous speed in-crease.

REDUCING THE STORED SPEED

The stored speed can be increased in twoways:

❒ by switching the device off and thenstoring a new speed;

or

❒ by moving the stalk downwards (–) un-til reaching the new speed which will bestored automatically.

Each operation of the stalk will corre-spond to a slight reduction in speed (about1 km/h), while keeping the stalk down-wards will correspond to a continuousspeed reduction.

SWITCHING THE DEVICE OFF

The device can be switch off in the fol-lowing ways:

❒ by turning knob A to OFF;

❒ by turning the engine off;

❒ by pressing the brake pedal;

❒ by pressing the clutch pedal;

❒ by pressing the accelerator pedal; in thiscase the system is not really switchedoff but the request for accelerationtakes priority over the system. Thecruise control is however active and itwill not be necessary to press buttonRES B-fig. 47 to resume previous con-ditions after ending acceleration.

The device is automatically switched off inone of the following cases:

❒ if the ABS or ESP systems cut-in;

❒ with car speed below the preset limit;

❒ in the case of system failure.

When travelling with the de-vice on, never set the

gearshift lever to neutral.

WARNING

In the event of device faultsor failures, turn knob A to

OFF and contact a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 71

Page 73: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

72

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS CEILING LIGHTS

FRONT CEILING WITH SPOTLIGHTS fig.48 /a AND WITHDIFFUSED LIGHTIING LED(where provided) fig.48 /b

Switch A turn on/off these lights.

With switch A in central position, lightsC and D will turn on/off when opening/closing the front doors.

With switch A pressed on the left side,lights C and D will always stay off. Withswitch A pressed on the right side, lightsC and D will always stay on.

Light turning on/off is gradual.

Switch B performs the spot function; withlight off, it will turn on:

❒ light C if pressed on the left side;

❒ light D if pressed on the right side.IMPORTANT Before getting out of thecar, make sure the switch is at central po-sition: lights off with doors closed in or-der to avoid draining the battery.

In any case, if the switch is left inadver-tently to the on position, the lights willturn off automatically 15 minutes afterturning the engine off.

fig. 48/a F0R0043m

FRONT CEILING LIGHT WITHMOVABLE LENS

The light will turn on/off by pressing themovable lens rightwards or leftwards asshown in fig. 49.

fig. 48/b F0R0240m

fig. 49 F0R0042m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 72

Page 74: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

73

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSCeiling light timing

On certain versions to facilitate gettingin/out of the car at night or with poorlighting, 2 different timed switching onmodes have been provided.

LIGHT TIMING WHEN GETTING INTO THE CAR

Lights will turn on as follows:

❒ for about 10 seconds when openingfront doors;

❒ for about 3 minutes when opening oneof the side doors;

❒ for about 10 seconds when closing thedoors.

Timing will stop when turning the ignitionkey to MAR.

LIGHT TIMING WHEN GETTING OUTOF THE CAR

After removing the key from the ignitionswitch, the ceiling lights will turn on as fol-lows:

❒ within 2 minutes from turning the en-gine off for about 10 seconds;

❒ when opening one of the side doors forabout 3 minutes;

❒ when closing one of the doors forabout 10 seconds.

Timing will stop automatically when lock-ing the doors.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 73

Page 75: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

74

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

COURTESY LIGHTS (where provided) fig. 53

Lights B by the side of the courtesy mir-ror will light up when cover A on the sunvisor on driver’s or passenger’s side israised with the key at MAR. The lights al-lows to use the courtesy mirror also inpoor conditions of light.

IMPORTANT The lights may only be op-erated for 15 minutes when the key isturned to stop STOP. They will be au-tomatically switched off after this to pro-tect the battery charge.

fig. 51 F0R0044m fig. 53

BB

A

F0R0216mfig. 52 F0R0045m

BOOT LIGHT (where provided)fig. 51

For versions fitted with boot light, it willturn on automatically when opening thetailgate and it will turn off at closing.

PUDDLE LIGHTS (where provided) fig. 52

These lights A are located in the doorsand they will turn on when opening therelevant door, regardless of the ignitionkey position.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 74

Page 76: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

75

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

ODDMENTS COMPARTMENTCOURTESY LIGHT (where provided) fig. 54

On versions where it is fitted, the lightcomes on automatically when the com-partment is opened and goes out when itis closed.

CONTROLS

HAZARD LIGHTS fig. 55

They turn on by pressing switch A, re-gardless of the position of the ignition key.

When the device is on, the switch is flash-ing and warning lights Î e ¥ on the pan-el come blink.

Press the switch again to turn the lightsoff.

The use of hazard lights is governed by theHighway Code of the country you are in.Keep to the rules.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS (where provided) fig. 56

To turn front fog lights on, press button5, to activate these lights it is necessaryto have the side/taillights switched on.The warning light 5 on the instrumentcluster will come on at the same time.Press the button again to turn the lights off. The use of fog lights is governed by theHighway Code of the country you are in.Keep to the rules.

fig. 55 F0R0047m

fig. 56 F0R0048m

fig. 54 F0R0305m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 75

Page 77: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

76

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

DOOR LOCK fig. 59

To open: pull lever A.

To close: close the door and press leverA. Also the rear doors will be locked inthis way (centralised door locking system).

Warning light ́ will light up with the cor-responding message on the multifunctionaldisplay (see chapter “Warning lights andMessages”).

fig. 58 F0R0035m

PARKING LIGHTS

These lights can only be turned on with ig-nition key at STOP or removed, by mov-ing the left stalk knurled ring first to O andthen to position 6 or 2.

The warning light 3 on the instrumentpanel will come on at the same time.

HEATED REAR WINDOW (where provided) fig. 58

Press button A to switch the device on.The device will be switched off automati-cally after approximately 20 minutes.

REAR FOG LIGHTS fig. 57Press button 4 to turn these lights onproviding the dipped beam headlights orthe front fog lights (where provided) areswitched on.

The warning light 4 on the instrumentpanel will light up.

Either press the button again or switch thedipped beam headlights and/or fog lights(where provided) off.

The use of fog lights is governed by theHighway Code of the country you are in.Keep to the rules.

fig. 59 F0R0023mfig. 57 F0R0049m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 76

Page 78: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

77

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSDoor unlocking in the event

of a crash

If the fuel cut-off switch trips following anaccident, the doors will be automaticallyunlocked to let you leave the car and theceiling lights will be switched on at thesame time. The doors can always beopened from the inside of the car bymeans of the specific levers.

Proceed as follows if no fuel leakage isfound and and the car is in condition to bedriven to rearm the fuel cut-off switch.

FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH

The car is fitted with a safety switch thatin the event of a crash comes into opera-tion by cutting off fuel and turning off theengine as a consequence.

This device therefore prevents fuel leaksdue to fuel piping breaking.

IMPORTANT After the accident, re-member to remove the electronic keyfrom the ignition device to prevent drain-ing the battery.

The message “FPS on” will appear on thedigital display when the switch trips. Themessage “Inertia switch tripped. See hand-book” will appear on the multifunctionaldisplay.

If, after a crash, you smell fu-el or see leaks from the fuel

system, do not reset the switch toavoid fine risk.

WARNING

If the centralised door lock-ing system was operated

from inside the car and the fuel cut-off switch did not manage to auto-matically release the doors, it will notbe possible to access the passengercompartment from the outside afteran accident. The possibility of open-ing the doors from the outside de-pends on the conditions of the doorsthemselves after the accident: if maynot be possible to open a damageddoor. In this case, try to open the oth-er doors of the car.

WARNING

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 77

Page 79: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

78

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

fig. 62 F0R0077m

fig. 61 F0R0104m

fig. 63 F0R0078m

INTERIOR FITTINGS

ODDMENT DRAWER fig. 61-62

To open the drawer operate handle A-fig. 61.

The compartment opening movement isslowed down by a dedicated device.

Inside the drawer there is a space A-fig.62 to keep documents.

When the oddment compartment isopened, an interior courtesy light comeson.

ODDMENT COMPARTMENTS

Oddment compartment A-fig. 63, is lo-cated on the dashboard, on the left of thesteering wheel.

Re-arming the fuel cut-off switch

Before resetting the fuel cut-off switch carefully inspect

the car for fuel leaks.

WARNING

To reset the fuel cut-off switch, press but-ton A-fig. 60.

fig. 60 F0R0208m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 78

Page 80: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

79

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

DOOR POCKETS fig. 66

Paper/map pockets are located in doorpanels.

FRONT ARMREST WITHODDMENT COMPARTMENT (where provided)

Certain versions are fitted with armrestA-fig. 67 between the front seats.

To use it, push it down as shown in fig. 68.

Press button A-fig. 68 to raise the up-per part of the arm rest and access com-partment B. Operate lever C to move thearmrest down with respect to the posi-tion of normal use.

fig. 64 F0R0053m

fig. 65 F0R0054m fig. 67 F0R0056m

fig. 68 F0R0057mfig. 66 F0R0055m

Oddment compartment B-fig. 64 is lo-cated in the middle of the dashboard.

CENTRAL CONSOLE ODDMENTCOMPARTMENT

The compartiment A-fig. 65 is located onthe dashboard central zone.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 79

Page 81: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

80

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

CIGAR LIGHTER (where provided) fig. 72

It is located on the central console in frontof the handbrake.

Press button A to switch on the cigarlighter with ignition key at MAR.

After about 15 seconds the button will re-turn to its initial position and is ready foruse.

IMPORTANT Always check that the cig-ar lighter has turned off.

fig. 72 F0R0061m

The cigar lighter becomesvery hot. Handle with care.

The device must not be used by chil-dren: risk of fire and/or burns.

WARNING

GLASS HOLDER - CAN HOLDERfig. 69-70

There are cup holders on the central tun-nel (two cup holders in front of the gear-box and one behind it).

CARD BOX - CD BOX fig. 71

The central console features recesses tokeep telephone cards CD holders andmagnetic cards.

fig. 69 F0R0058m fig. 71 F0R0060m

fig. 70 F0R0059m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 80

Page 82: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

81

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

ASHTRAY (where provided) fig. 73-74

The ashtray is a removable plastic box thatcan be fitted into the glass/can recesses onthe central console.

IMPORTANT Do not use the box as anashtray and a waste paper basket at thesame time: it might set on fire in contactwith cigarette stubs.

SUN VISORS fig. 75

These are arranged at the sides of the in-ternal rearview mirror. They may be ori-ented frontally and to the side.

A courtesy mirror can be applied to theback of sun visors.

On certain versions to use the mirror(where provided) you shall open the slid-ing cover A.

A courtesy light may light up accordingto the versions when the cover is opened.

fig. 73 F0R0062m fig. 75 F0R0064m fig. 76 F0R0065m

fig. 74 F0R0063m

MAP POCKET (where provided)

On certain versions a map pocket is lo-cated on the back of the seat backrest fig. 76.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 81

Page 83: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

82

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS DOORS

CENTRAL DOORLOCKING/UNLOCKING SYSTEM

Locking from the outside

With the doors closed, press button Áonthe remote control fig. 77 or insert andturn the metallic insert in the driver’s sidedoor lock and turn clockwise fig. 78 (an-ticlockwise on the passenger door ). TheLED on the driver’s door will blink onceto indicate that the doors have beenlocked. The doors will be locked only if alldoors are closed. If one or more doorsare open, the indication indicators and theLED on the driver’s door will flash in rapidsequence for approximately 3 seconds ifone or more doors are open when but-ton Á on the remote control is pressedfig. 77.

If instead one or more doors are openedafter turning the metallic insert of the key,only the LED on the driver’s door willblink rapidly for approximately three sec-onds. If all the doors are closed and theboot is open, the doors are locked and:the direction indicators (if locked by press-ing Á fig. 77 only) and the LED on thedriver’s door will flash rapidly for ap-proximately 3 seconds.

Door unlocking from the outside

Briefly press button Ë fig. 77 to obtainremote door unlocking, timed ceiling lightturning on, directions indicator doubleflashing or fit the metal insert into the dri-ver’s door lock and turn it anticlockwise.

fig. 78 F0R0067m

fig. 79 F0R0000m

Door locking/unlocking from theinside

Press lever A-fig. 79 to unlock all doors.Pull the lever to unlock all doors. A LEDon the driver’s door will indicate the state(doors locked or unlocked). The LED ison when the doors are locked and offwhen the doors are unlocked. The doorswill be locked only if all doors are closed.

Lacking power (blown fuse, battery dis-connected, etc.) it is however possible tolock the doors manually.

After exceeding 20 km/h speed, doors willbe locked automatically if the set up menufunction has been selected (see paragraph“Multifunction display” in this section).

fig. 77 F0R0066m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 82

Page 84: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

83

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

CHILD LOCK fig. 80

This device prevents opening the reardoors from the inside. This device can beengaged only with rear doors open.❒ position 1 - device engaged (door

locked);❒ position 2 - device not engaged (door

may be opened from the inside).The device A-fig. 80 stays on even if thedoors are unlocked by the centralisedsystem.

fig. 80 F0R0068m

Always use this device whentransporting children. After

engaging the child lock on both reardoors, check for proper engagementby trying to open a rear door with theinternal handle.

WARNING

WINDOW WINDERS

POWER WINDOWS

The driver’s door armrest features twofig. 82 or (where provided) five fig. 81switches that with key at MAR shall beused:

A to open/close the left front window;

B to open/close the right front window;

C to open/close the left rear window(where provided);

D to open/close the right rear window(where provided);

E to inhibit rear door controls (whereprovided).

fig. 81 F0R0200m

fig. 82 F0R0201m

Automatic continuous operation(where provided)

Power windows are equipped with anup/down mechanism for the front driverside window and of a mechanism just forthe down movement of the other win-dows.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 83

Page 85: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

84

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Hold one of the buttons pressed for

longer than half a second to operate theautomatic continuous window operationfunction. The window will stop when itsreached end of travel or when the but-ton is pressed again.

The system conforms to the forthcoming standard

2000/4/EC concerning the safety ofpassengers leaning out of the pas-senger compartment.

WARNINGIMPORTANT With ignition key at STOPor removed, the power windows remainactivated for about 2 minutes and are de-activated immediately the moment a dooris opened.

Important On some versions, pressing theremote control button Ë for over 2 sec-onds will open the windows whereaspressing the remote control button Á forover 2 seconds will close them.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 84

Page 86: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

85

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Power window system initialisation

Safety system shall be re-initialised afterdisconnecting the battery or if the rele-vant protection fuse is blown.

Initialisation procedure:

❒ fully close manually the window to ini-tialise;

❒ rafter the window has reached the up-per end of travel, hold the up buttonpressed for at least one second.

Incorrect use of the powerwindows may be dangerous.

Before operation, always check thatno-one is exposed to the risk of beinginjured by directly by the moving win-dow or objects getting caught anddragged. When leaving the car, al-ways remove the key from the igni-tion device to avoid the risk of injurydue to accidental operation of thepower windows.

WARNING

Front and rear passenger doorwindows (where provided)

Front passenger door armrest and reardoor armrests feature the switches A-fig. 83 to be used for controlling the cor-responding window.

Press button A-fig. 84 to inhibit rear doorcontrols (where provided).

MANUAL REAR (where provided) fig. 85

To open and to close the window use therelevant window winder.

fig. 85 F0R0070mfig. 83 F0R0069m

fig. 84 F0R0000m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 85

Page 87: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

86

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS BOOT

OPENING THE BOOT

The boot lock may be released from theoutside of the car by pressing R on theremote control (where provided) or byinserting and turning the metallic insert ofthe key in the boot lock anticlockwise asshown in fig. 88. The boot lock can be re-leased from inside the vehicle operatingon lever A-fig.87 located on driver sideseat or pressing push-button B-fig.89.

BOOT CLOSING

To close the boot, lower it onto the lockuntil you hear it click. In emergency con-ditions (if either the remote control or carbattery is flat), release the boot lock byturn the key in clockwise.

fig. 86 F0R0071m

fig. 87 F0R0210m

fig. 88 F0R0072m

Do not fit additional objectsonto the rear window shelf ortailgate (speakers, spoilers,etc.) except when contem-

plated by the manufacturer to ensurethe correct operation of the side gasshock absorbers of the tailgate itself.

Never exceed the maximumallowed load in the boot (see

“Technical Specifications”). Makesure that the objects are wellarranged in the boot so that they willnot be projected forwards followingsudden braking.

WARNING

Never travel with objects onthe rear window shelf: they

cause cause injury to passengers inthe event of an accident or suddenbraking.

WARNING

fig. 89

B

F0R0239m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 86

Page 88: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

87

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSEXTENDING THE BOOT

Partial extension (where provided)(1/3 or 2/3) fig. 91

The boot can be partially (1/3 or 2/3) ortotally extended splitting the rear seat.

Proceed as follows:

❒ tip the cushions forward;fig. 90 F0R0075m

fig. 91 F0R0076m

❒ pull the two locking devices A-fig. 90upwards to unlock respectively the leftor right section of the backrest andthen guide the backrest onto the cush-ion.

The boot extension to the right makes itpossible to carry two passengers on therear seat left-hand side.

The boot extension to the left makes itpossible to carry one passenger on therear seat right-hand side.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 87

Page 89: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

88

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

fig. 93 F0R0078m

To return the rear seat back to itsoriginal position fig. 93

Lift the backrests and push them back un-til your hear both fastening mechanismsclick and return the cushions to the nor-mal position of use.

IMPORTANT When return the backrestto the position of use, make sure it is cor-rectly fastened and you hear the lock click.

Maximum extension fig. 92

Tilt the rear seat completely to obtainmaximum boot extension.

Proceed as follows:

❒ completely lower the rear seat head re-straints;

❒ tip the cushions forward;

❒ pull the fastening devices A-fig. 90 up-wards to release the backrests and foldthem onto the cushion.

fig. 92 F0R0077m

Make sure the backrest isproperly secured at both

sides to prevent it moves forward inthe event of sharp braking causing in-juries to passengers.

WARNING

BONNET

OPENING THE BONNET

Proceed as follows:

❒ pull lever fig. 94 in the direction of thearrow;

❒ operate lever A-fig. 95 as shown in thefigure;

❒ lift the bonnet and at the same time re-lease the rod D-fig. 96 from the catch,then fit end C-fig. 97 of the rod intothe bonnet recess E.

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 88

Page 90: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

89

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

IMPORTANT Before opening the bonnet,check that windscreen wiper arms are notlifted from the windscreen.

CLOSING THE BONNET

Proceed as follows:

❒ hold the bonnet up with one hand andwith the other remove rod C-fig. 97from seat E and fit it back into its catchD-fig. 96;

❒ lower the bonnet to approximately 20centimetres from the engine compart-ment and let it drop. Make sure that thebonnet is completely closed and notonly fastened by the safety catch by try-ing to open it. If it is not perfectlyclosed, open the bonnet and repeat theprocedure. No not simply press it.

IMPORTANT Always check that the bon-net is closed properly to avoid its openingwhile the car is travelling.

fig. 94 F0R0080m fig. 95 F0R0079m

fig. 97 F0R0082m

fig. 96 F0R0081m

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 89

Page 91: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

90

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

The bonnet must always beperfectly closed while trav-

elling for reasons of safety. Make surethat the bonnet is perfectly closedand that the lock is engaged. If youdiscover that the bonnet is not per-fectly closed while travelling, stop im-mediately and close the bonnet in thecorrect manner.

WARNING

The bonnet may drop sud-denly if the supporting rod is

not in correct position.

WARNING

Perform these operationswhen the car is stationary

only.

WARNING

ROOF RACK/SKI RACK

Front couplings are set at points A-fig. 98.

Front couplings are set at points B.

IMPORTANT Follow the instructionscontained in the assembly kit to the letter.Assembly must be performed by qualifiedpersonnel.

fig. 98 F0R0217mCheck that the attachmentfastening screws are correct-

ly positioned after a few kilometres.

WARNING

Respect the laws in force con-cerning maximum clearance.

Distribute the load evenlyand when driving, bear in

mind the increased sensitivity of thecar to side wind.

WARNING

Never exceed the permittedweight (see section “Techni-cal specifications”).

044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 90

Page 92: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

91

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSHEADLIGHTS

BEAM DIRECTION

Correction direction of the headlights isessentially for the comfort and safety ofthe driver and the other road users. Theheadlights must be correctly directed toensure the best visibility conditions whenthe headlights are on. Contact Fiat Deal-ership to have the headlights properly ad-justed.

HEADLIGHT AIMING DEVICE

This device works with the key at MARand the dipped beam headlights on. Thecar will slant backwards when it is loaded,raising the light beam. The beams musttherefore be directed again in this case.

Aiming the headlights fig. 99

Press Ò and on the control panel.

The display located on the instrument pan-el, provides the visual indication of the po-sitions during the adjustment operation.

Position 0 - one or two passengers onfront seats.

Position 1 - five passengers.

Position 2 - five passengers + load in theboot.

Position 3 - driver + maximum admittedload in the boot.

IMPORTANT Check beam aiming everytime the load carried changes.

AIMING THE FRONT FOGLIGHTS (where provided)

Contact Fiat Dealership to have the head-lights properly adjusted.

fig. 99 F0R0083m

091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 91

Page 93: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

92

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS ABS SYSTEM

If you have never driven a car with ABS be-fore, it is advisable to perform a few testson slippery ground, naturally in conditionsof safety and respecting the Highway Codeof the country where you are driving. Readthe following information carefully.

The car is fitted with an ABS braking sys-tem, which prevents the wheels from lock-ing when braking, makes the most of roadgrip and gives the best control when emer-gency braking under difficulty road condi-tions.

System is completed by EBD (ElectronicBraking force Distribution), which dis-tributes the braking action between frontand rear wheels.

IMPORTANT Maximum efficiency of thebraking system is obtained after approxi-mately 500 km (when the car is new or af-ter replacing the brake pads/discs): duringthis time, avoid sudden, repeated and pro-longed braking.

The ABS exploits the tyre-road grip at the best, but it

cannot improve it; you should there-fore take every care when driving onslippery surfaces without taking un-necessary risks.

WARNING

ABS SYSTEM INTERVENTION

Intervention of the ABS is detected by aslight pulsing of the brake pedal accompa-nied by noise: such an event indicates thatyou need to adjust your speed to the typeof road on which you are travelling.

When the ABS intervenes itmeans that you are ap-

proaching the grip limit between tyresand road: slow down to exploit all theavailable grip.

WARNING

FAILURE INDICATIONS

ABS failure

ABS failure is indicated by the turning onof warning light >on the instrument pan-el together with the dedicated message onthe multifunctional display (where pro-vided), (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).

In the case, the braking system will workas normal without the extra potentials of-fered by the ABS system. Drive carefullyto the nearest Fiat Dealership to have thesystem checked.

091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 92

Page 94: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

93

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSBRAKE ASSIST

(integrated ESP emergencybraking assistance) (where provided)

This system (which cannot be deactivat-ed) recognises emergency braking condi-tions according to the speed of operationof the brake pedal and provides an addi-tional hydraulic braking pressure to sup-port that provided by the driver. This al-lows faster and more power operation ofthe braking system.

Brake Assist is deactivated on the versionsequipped with ESP, in the event of ESP sys-tem failure (indicated by warning light áswitching on together with the messageon the multifunctional display, where pro-vided).

ESP SYSTEM (Electronic StabilityProgram) (where provided)

The ESP system is an electronic systemcontrolling the car stability in the event oftyre grip loss.

The ESP system is therefore particularlyuseful when grip conditions of the road sur-faces changes.

In addition to the ESP system, ASR systemand Hill Holder, (where provided) also theMSR system (adjusting the engine brakingtorque) and the HBA system (improvingthe braking force during emergency brak-ing) are provided.

ABS SYSTEM INTERVENTION

It is signalled by the blinking of the warn-ing light á on the instrument panel, toinform the driver that the car is in criti-cal stability and grip conditions.

When the ABS cuts in, andyou feel the brake pedal pul-

sating, do not remove your foot, butkeep it pressed; in doing so you willstop in the shortest amount of spacepossible under the current road con-ditions.

WARNING

EBD failure

ABS failure is indicated by the turning onwarning lights > and x on the instru-ment panel together with the dedicatedmessage on the multifunctional display(where provided), (see section “Warninglights and messages”).

In this case, the rear wheels may sudden-ly lock and the car may swerve. Drivecarefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership tohave the system checked.

If warning light x only lightsup on the instrument panel

(with a message on the multifunc-tional display, where provided), stopthe car immediate and go to thenearest Fiat Dealership. Leakage ofhydraulic fluid from the braking sys-tem will compromise functionality ofthe braking system, either of the con-ventional type or with ABS.

WARNING

091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 93

Page 95: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

94

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS ESP SYSTEM ACTIVATION

The ESP system is automatically activat-ed when the car is started and cannot bede-activated.

FAILURE INDICATIONS

In the event of a failure, the In ESP will beautomatically switched off and warninglight áwill appear on the instrument pan-el along with a message on the multifunc-tional display (where provided) (see“Warning lights and messages”). The LEDon the ASR OFF button will light up. Con-tact Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

Do not take unnecessaryrisks, even if your cars fits an

ESP system. Your driving style mustalways be suited to the conditions ofthe road, visibility and traffic. The dri-ver is always and only responsible forroad safety.

WARNING

HILL HOLDER SYSTEM

This system is an integral part of the ESPsystem and it is provided to facilitate start-ing on slopes.

It will activate automatically with the fol-lowing conditions:

❒ uphill: car at a standstill on a road witha gradient higher than 5%, engine run-ning, clutch and brake pedal pressed,gearbox to neutral or engaged gear oth-er than reverse.

❒ downhill: car at a standstill on a roadwith a gradient higher than 5%, enginerunning, clutch and brake pedal pressedand reverse gear engaged.

At pickup the ESP system control unit willkeep brake force on wheels until reachingthe torque suitable for starting, or in anycase for max. 2 seconds in order to passeasily from the brake pedal to the accel-erator pedal.

After 2 seconds without starting, the sys-tem will deactivate automatically by re-leasing gradually the brake force.

At releasing, the typical brake disengage-ment noise indicating that the car is go-ing to move will be heard.

Failure indications

Warning light è on the instrument pan-el will light up in the event of a failure (see“Warning lights and messages”).

IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system isnot a parking brake therefore, never leavethe car without having engaged the hand-brake, turned the engine off and engagedthe first speed.

For correct operation of theESP and ASR systems, the

tyres must absolutely be of the samebrand and type on all wheels, in per-fect conditions and, above all, oftype, brand and size specified.

WARNING

091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 94

Page 96: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

95

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

MSR system (engine braking torque control)

It is an integral part of the ASR system thatin case of sudden gear shifting, cuts in pro-viding torque to the engine thus prevent-ing excessive driving wheel drive that, spe-cially in poor grip conditions, can lead toloss of stability.

Switching the system on/off fig. 100The ASR system switches on automaticallyeach time the engine is started. When travelling, the ASR can be switchedoff and on again pres100.

When the ASR is switched off this isshown by the lighting up of the led on thebutton and by relevant message on themultifunction display, where provided.If the ASR is switched off when travelling,it will turn on again automatically the nexttime the engine is started.It may be useful to switch the ASR whendriving on snow-covered roads with snowchains fitted: in these conditions, slippingof the wheels during pick-up provides bet-ter traction.

For correct operation of theESP and ASR systems, the

tyres must absolutely be of the samebrand and type on all wheels, in per-fect conditions and, above all, oftype, brand and size specified.

WARNING

fig. 100

ASROFF

A

F0R0218m

ASR SYSTEM (Antislip Regulator)The ASR function controls car drive andcuts in automatically every time one orboth driving wheels slip.

According to slipping conditions, two dif-ferent control systems are activated:

❒ if slipping involves both driving wheels,the ASR function intervenes reducingthe power transmitted by the engine;

❒ if the slipping involves only one drivingwheel, the ASR system cuts in auto-matically braking the wheel that is slip-ping.

The action of the ASR is particularly help-ful in the following circumstances:

❒ slipping of the inner wheel due to theeffect of dynamic load changes or ex-cessive acceleration;

❒ too much power transmitted to thewheels also in relation to the conditionsof the road surface;

❒ acceleration on slippery, snowy orfrozen surfaces;

❒ in the case of loss of grip on a wet sur-face (aquaplaning).

091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 95

Page 97: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

96

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Do not take unnecessaryrisks, even if your cars fits

such a system. Your driving style mustalways be suited to the conditions ofthe road, visibility and traffic. The dri-ver is always and only responsible forroad safety.

WARNING

For correct operation of the ASR system,the tyres must absolutely be of the samebrand and type on all wheels, in perfectconditions and, above all, of type, brandand size specified.

FAILURE INDICATIONS

In the event of a failure, the In ASR will beautomatically switched off and warninglight á will appear on the instrumentpanel along with a message on the multi-functional display (where provided) (see“Warning lights and messages”). In thiscase, contact Fiat Dealership as soon aspossible.

EOBD SYSTEM(where provided)

The EOBD system (European On BoardDiagnosis) allows continuous diagnosis ofthe components of the car correlated withemissions.

It also alerts the driver, by turning on thewarning light U on the instrument pan-el (together with relevant message on themultifunctional display, where provided)(see section “Warning lights and mes-sages”), when these conditions are nolonger in peak conditions.

The objective is:

❒ to monitor system efficiency;

❒ warn when a fault causes emissions lev-els to increase;

❒ to warn of the need to replace deteri-orated components.

The system also has a diagnostic connec-tor that can be interfaced with appropri-ate tools, which makes it possible to readthe error codes stored in the control unit,together with a series of specific parame-ters for engine operation and diagnosis.This check can also be carried out by thetraffic police.

IMPORTANT After eliminating the in-convenience, to check the system com-pletely, Fiat Dealerships are obliged to runa bench test and, if necessary, road testswhich may also call for a long journey.

Go to a Fiat Dealership assoon as possible if warninglight U either does not lightup when the key is turned to

MAR to if while travelling the warninglights comes on either steady or blink-ing (along with a message on the mul-tifunctional display, where provided).The operation of warning light Umaybe checked by the traffic police usingspecific devices. Follow the laws inforce in the country where you are dri-ving.

091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 96

Page 98: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

97

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSPARKING SENSORS

(where provided)

Parking sensors are located in the rearbumper fig. 101 and their function is toinform the driver, through an intermittentbuzzer, about the presence of obstaclesbehind the car.

ACTIVATION

The sensors are automatically activatedwhen the reverse gear is engaged.

As the distance from the obstacle behindthe car decreases, the acoustic alarm be-comes more frequent.

BUZZER WARNINGS

When the reverse gear is engaged an in-termittent acoustic signal is automaticallyactivated.

The acoustic signal:

❒ becomes louder as the reduction of dis-tance between the car and the obstacledecreases;

❒ becomes continuous when the distancebetween the car and the obstacle is lessthat 30 cm and stops immediately if thedistance increases;

❒ is constant if the distance is unvaried;if this situation concerns the side sen-sors, the buzzer will stop after about3 seconds to avoid, for example, warn-ing indications in the event of manoeu-vres along walls.

Detection distances

Central action radius 150 cm

Side action radius 60 cm

If several obstacles are detected, the con-trol unit indicates the nearest one.

FAILURE INDICATIONS

Parking sensor failures, if any, will be in-dicated when engaging reverse by theturning on of the instrument panel warn-ing light t together with the message onthe multifunction display, where provided(see section “Warning lights and mes-sages”).

fig. 101 F0R0084m

091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 97

Page 99: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

98

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS GENERAL WARNINGS

❒ When parking, take the utmost care toobstacles that may be set above or un-der the sensors.

❒ Objects set close to the car, under cer-tain circumstances are not detected andcould therefore cause damages to thecar or be damaged.

❒ Indications sent by the sensors can bealtered by dirt, snow or ice depositedon the sensors or by ultrasound sys-tems (e.g.: truck pneumatic brakes orpneumatic hammers) set nearby thecar.

The sensor must be cleanfrom mud, dirt, snow or ice inorder for the system to work.Be careful not to scratch or

damage the sensor while cleaningthem. Avoid using dry, rough or hardcloths. Clean the sensors with cleanwater with the addition of car sham-poo if necessary.

The driver is always and on-ly responsible for parking

and other dangerous manoeuvres.Make sure that no-one is standing inthe area, especially children or ani-mals. Parking sensors are designed toassist drivers: in all cases, you must al-ways pay the utmost attention duringpotentially dangerous manoeuvres.

WARNINGOPERATION WITH TRAILER

Parking sensor operation is deactivated au-tomatically when the trailer electric cableplug is fitted into the car tow hook socket.

Sensors are reactivated when removingthe trailer cable plug.

In washing stations, clean sensors quicklykeeping the vapour jet/high pressurewashing nozzles at 10 cm at least from thesensors.

091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 98

Page 100: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

99

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSSOUND SYSTEM

(where provided)

For the operation of the radio withCD/MP3 CD (where provided), read theinstructions for use given in the Supple-ment attached to the Owner Handbook.

SOUND SYSTEM PRESETTING(where provided)The system consists of:❒ sound system power wires❒ front and rear speaker connecting

wires❒ aerial power wire❒ 2 tweeters on front doors (30W max

power each);❒ 2 mid-woofers on front doors (165

mm diameter, 40W max powereach);

❒ 4/6 full-range speakers on rear doorsand rear valance panels (130 mmdiameter, 40W max power each);

❒ radio aerial wire.

Sound system installation

The sound system shall be installed in theproper space occupied by the centraloddment compartment, here you will findthe preset cables.

Lower the fasteners shown in fig. 102 toremove the box.

fig. 102 F0R0085m

For connection to existing carpresetting system, contact

Fiat Dealership to prevent any troublethat could impair car safety.

WARNING

091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 99

Page 101: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

100

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS TRANSCEIVERSAND MOBILE PHONES

Radio transceiver equipment (e.g.: e-tacsmobile phones, HAM radio systems andthe like) shall not be used inside the carunless a separate aerial is mounted on theroof.

IMPORTANT The use of similar devicesinside the passenger compartment (with-out separated aerial) produces radio-fre-quency electromagnetic fields which, am-plified by the resonance effects inside thepassenger compartment, may cause elec-trical systems equipping the car to mal-function. This could compromise safety inaddition to constituting a potential hazardfor the passengers.

In addition, transmission and reception ofthese devices may be affected by theshielding effect of the car body.

As concerns EC-approved mobile phones(GSM, GPRS, UMTS), strictly comply withthe instructions for use provided by themobile phone’s manufacturer.

ACCESSORIESPURCHASED BY THEOWNER

If after buying the car, you decide to installelectrical accessories that require a per-manent electric supply (alarm, satellite an-titheft system, etc.) or accessories that inany case burden the electric supply, con-tact Fiat Dealership, whose qualified per-sonnel, besides suggesting the most suit-able devices belonging to Lineaccessori Fi-at, will also evaluate the overall electric ab-sorption, checking whether the car’s elec-tric system is able to withstand the loadrequired, or whether it needs to be inte-grated with a more powerful battery.

Be very careful when fittingnon-standard additional

spoilers, light alloy wheels or wheelcups: they could reduce brake venti-lation and consequently brake effi-ciency in the case of repeated, violentbraking or on long downhill roads.Make sure that nothing obstructs thepedal stroke (mats, etc.)

WARNING

ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONICDEVICE INSTALLATION

Electrical and electronic devices installedafter buying the car by after-market ser-vice must carry the following label:

Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorises the installationof transceiving devices provided that theyare installed according to rules of good en-gineering practice respecting the manu-facturer’s indications by a specialised cen-tre.

IMPORTANT Traffic police may not allowthe car on the road in the event of as-sembly of devices which imply modifica-tions to the features of the car. This mayalso cause lapse of warranty in relation tofaults caused by the change or either di-rectly or indirectly related to it.

Fiat Auto S.p.A. shall not be liable for dam-age caused by the installation of acces-sories either not supplied or recom-mended by Fiat Auto S.p.A. and/or in-stalled in compliance with the provided in-structions.

091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 100

Page 102: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

101

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSAT THE FILLING

STATION

PETROL ENGINES

Use only unleaded petrol.

To avoid mistakes, the diameter of the fu-el filler is too small to introduce the beakof a leaded petrol pump. The petrol oc-tane rating (RON) must not be lower than 95.

IMPORTANT An inefficient catalyst leadsto harmful exhaust emissions, thus con-tributing to air pollution.

IMPORTANT Never use leaded petrol,even in small amount or in an emergency,as this would damage the catalyst beyondrepair.

DIESEL ENGINES

If the outside temperature is very low, thediesel thickens due to the formation ofparaffin clots and could clog the diesel fu-el filter.

In order to avoid these problems, differ-ent types of diesel are distributed ac-cording to the season: summer type, win-ter type and arctic type (cold, mountainareas).

If refuelling with diesel fuel whose featuresare not suitable to the temperature of use,it is advisable to mix TUTELA DIESEL ARTadditive in the proportions shown on thecontainer with the fuel. Pour the additiveinto the tank before the fuel.

When using or parking the car for a longtime in the mountains or cold areas, it isadvisable to refuel using locally availablefuel.

In this case, it is also advisable to keep thetank over 50% full.

For diesel engines, use dieselfuel for motor vehicles com-pliant with EN590 Europeanspecifications only. The use of

other products or mixtures may dam-age the engine beyond repair and con-sequently cause lapse of warranty inrelation to the damage caused. If youaccidentally introduce other types offuel in the tank, do not start the engineand empty the tank. If the engine hasrun also for a very short time, you willneed to have the entire fuel feed sys-tem emptied in addition to the tank.

Filling the tank

To fill the tank completely, top-up twiceafter the pump switches off. Further top-ups could cause faults in the fuel feedingsystem.

091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 101

Page 103: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

102

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

FUEL FILLER CAP fig. 103

To carry out fuelling, if your car fits a cen-tralised door locking system, unlock thedoors, open lid A and unscrew cap B; thecap is fitted with a special device C whichfastens it to the lid so it cannot be mislaid.

If your car does not fit a centralised lock-ing system, operate lever A-fig. 104 torelease the flap.

In some versions, cap B may be providedwith a lock and key; use the ignition keyto access the flap A-fig. 103, turn it an-ticlockwise and loosen the cap itself.

The airtight closing may determine a slightincrease of pressure in the tank. A suctionnoise when you release the cap is there-fore entirely normal.

PROTECTING THEENVIRONMENT

The devices for curtailing petrol engineemissions are the following:

❒ three-way catalytic converter;

❒ lambda sensors;

❒ fuel evaporation system.

In addition, do not let the engine run, evenfor a test, with one or more spark plugsdisconnected.

The devices for curtailing diesel fuel en-gine emissions are the following:

❒ oxidising catalytic converter;

❒ exhaust gas recirculation system(E.G.R.).

fig. 103 F0M0203m

Do not approach nakedflames or lit sigarettes to the

fuel filler: fire risk. Keep your faceaway from the fuel filler to preventbreathing in harmful vapours.

WARNING

fig. 104 F0R0210m

When refuelling, position the cap on thedevice inside the lid as shown in fig. 103.

The catalytic converter de-velops high temperature dur-

ing operation. Do not park on grass,dry leaves, pine needles or other flam-mable material: fire risk.

WARNING

091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 102

Page 104: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

103

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

SEAT BELTS ........................................................................... 104

S.B.R. SYSTEM ....................................................................... 105

PRETENSIONERS.................................................................. 106

CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY...................................... 109

“UNIVERSAL ISOFIX” CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ASSEMBLY SETUP........................ 114

FRONT AIRBAGS................................................................. 115

SIDE AIRBAGS ...................................................................... 118

SSSAAFFEETTYY DDEEVVIICCEESS

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 103

Page 105: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

104

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

The rear seat belts must be used as shownin the diagram in fig. 2.

SEAT BELTS

USING THE SEAT BELTS fig. 1

The belt should be worn keeping the cheststraight and rested against the seat back.

To fasten the seat belts, take hold thetongue A and insert it into the buckle B,until hearing the locking click.

At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for ashort stretch, then pull it out again with-out jerking.

Press button C to release the belt. Ac-company the belt while it is being re-wound to prevent twisting.

Through the reel, the belt automaticallyadapts to the body of the passenger wear-ing it, allowing freedom of movement.

The reel may lock when the car is parkedon a steep slope: this is perfectly normal.Furthermore, the reel mechanism locksthe belt if it is pulled and in the event ofsudden braking, collisions and on highspeed bends.

The rear seat is fitted with inertial seatbelts with three anchor points and reel.

fig. 1 F0R0150m

fig. 2 F0R0088m

Never press button C-fig. 1when travelling.

WARNING

fig. 3

A

B

F0R0151m

ADJUSTING THE FRONT SEATBELT HEIGHT

Always adjust the seat belt height to thepassenger’s body: this precaution mayconsiderably reduce the risk of injury inthe event of a collision.

Correct regulation is obtained when thebelt passes approximately half way be-tween the shoulder and the neck.

To adjust, move the grip A-fig. 3 of thelocking mechanism either up or down andat the same time move the ring B-fig. 3to the most suitable of the allowed posi-tions.

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 104

Page 106: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

105

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

IMPORTANT Make sure the backrest iscorrectly fastened when returning it to theposition of normal use after folding it.

S.B.R. SYSTEM

The car is fitted with the S.B.R. system(Seat Belt Reminder), consisting of abuzzer which, together with the turningon of warning light < on the instrumentpanel, warns the driver to fasten the seatbelt.

The buzzer can be deactivated (until thenext engine stop) as follows:

❒ fasten the driver’s and passenger’s seatbelt;

❒ turn the ignition key to MAR;

❒ wait for over 20 seconds and then re-lease one of the seat belts.

For permanent deactivation, contact FiatDealership.

With digital display, the S.B.R. system canonly be reset at Fiat Dealership.

Remember that in the eventof a violent collision, back

seat passengers not wearing seat beltsalso represent a serious danger forthe front seat passengers.

WARNING

Make sure the backrest isproperly secured at both

sides to prevent it moves forward inthe event of sharp braking causing in-juries to passengers.

WARNING

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 105

Page 107: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

106

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SPRETENSIONERS

To increase the efficiency of the seat belts,the car is fitted with pretensioners. Thesedevices, in the event of a violent crash,rewind the seat belts a few centimetres.In this way they ensure that the seat beltadheres perfectly to the wearer before therestraining action begins.

The seat belt locks to indicate that the de-vice has intervened; the seat belt cannotbe drawn back up even when guiding itmanually.

IMPORTANT To obtain the highest de-gree of protection from the action of thepretensioner, wear the seat belt keepingit firmly close to the chest and pelvis.

A slight amount of smoke may be detect-ed during operation of the pretensioners.This smoke is not harmful and does notindicate a fire.

The pretensioner does not require anymaintenance or greasing.

Anything that modifies its original condi-tions invalidates its efficiency.

If due to unusual natural events (floods,seas storm, etc.) the device has been af-fected by water and mud, it must neces-sarily be replaced.

LOAD LIMITERS

To increase passenger’s safety, the frontseat belt reels contain a load limiter whichallows controlled sag in such a way as todose the force acting on the chest andshoulders during the belt restraining ac-tion in case of front crash.

The pretensioner can onlybe used once. Go to a Fiat

Dealership to have it replaced afteris has been deployed. The expirationdate is shown on the label in the odd-ment compartment: go to a FiatDealership to have the device re-placed when the expiration date ap-proaches.

WARNING

Operations which lead toknocks, vibrations or localisedheating (over 100°C for amaximum of 6 hours) in the

area around the pretensioners maycause damage or trigger them. Thesedevices are not affected by vibrationscaused by irregularities of the road sur-face or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc.Contact a Fiat Dealership for any as-sistance.

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 106

Page 108: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

107

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FORUSING THE SEAT BELTS

The driver is responsible for respectingand ensuring that all the other occupantsof the car also respect the local laws inforce in relation to the use of seat belts.Always fasten the seat belts before start-ing off.

Seat belts must also be used by pregnantwomen: risk will be significantly reducedfor both the expectant mother and thechild in the event of an accident.

Of course they must position the lowerpart of the belt very low down so that itpasses under the abdomen, see fig. 4.

fig. 4 F0R0089m fig. 5 F0R0090m fig. 6 F0R0091m

The belt must not be twist-ed. The upper part must

cross the shoulder and the chest di-agonally. The lower part must adhereto the hips fig. 4 not to the abdomen.Do not use devices (clips, etc.) to holdthe seat belt away from your body.

WARNING

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 107

Page 109: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

108

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SFor maximum safety, keepthe back of your seat up-

right, lean back into it and make surethe seat belt fits closely across yourchest and hips. Always fasten the seatbelts on both the front and the rearseats. Travelling without seat beltswill increase the risk of severe injuryand even death in the event of an ac-cident.

WARNING

Never disassemble or tamperwith the seat belt or preten-

sioner components. All interventionsmust be performed by qualified andauthorised personnel only. Always goto a Fiat Dealership

WARNING

If the belt has been subject-ed to heavy stress, for ex-

ample after and accident, it should bechanged completely together withthe anchors, anchor fastening screwsand the pretensioners. In fact, even ifthe belt has no visible defects, it couldhave lost its resilience.

WARNING

Each seat belt may only beused by one person at a

time: do not carry children on yourlap with one seat belt protectingboth. In general, do not place any ob-jects between the person and belt.

WARNING

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 108

Page 110: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

109

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

HOW TO KEEP THE SEATBELTS ALWAYS IN EFFICIENTCONDITIONS

Observe the following:

❒ always use the belt with the tap taut andnever twisted; make sure that it is freeto run without impediments;

❒ replace the belt after an accident of acertain severity even if it does not ap-pear damaged. Always replace the beltif the pretensioners where deployed.

❒ to clean the belt, wash by hand with wa-ter and mild soap, rinse and leave to dryin the shade. Do not use strong deter-gents, bleach, paints or any other sub-stance which could damage the belt fi-bres;

❒ keep the reels dry: correct operationmay only be ensured if the reels are dry;

❒ replace the seat belt when showing sig-nificant wear or cut signs.

For optimal protection in the event of acrash, all passengers must be seated andwearing adequate restraint systems.

This is even more important for children.

This prescription is compulsory in all ECcountries according to EC Directive2003/20/EC.

A child’s head is larger and heavier in pro-portion to its body and the child’s muscu-lar and bone structures are not fully de-veloped. For this reason, they require re-straint systems which are different fromthose used by adults to protect them in theevent of an accident. The research resultsin relation to the best protection for chil-dren is illustrated in European RegulationEEC-R44 which divides the restraint sys-tems into five groups in addition to mak-ing their use compulsory:

Group 0 0-10 kg in weight

Group 0+ 0-13 kg in weight

Group 1 9-18 kg in weight

Group 2 15-25 kg in weight

Group 3 22-36 kg in weight

As it may be noted, the groups overlappartly and in fact, in commerce it is pos-sible to find devices that cover more thanone weight group.

All restraint devices must bear the certi-fication data, together with the controlbrand, on a solidly fixed label which mustabsolutely never be removed.

CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 109

Page 111: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

110

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SDo not place a cradle seatfacing backwards on the

front seat if the passenger side airbagis on. Deployment of the airbag in anaccident could cause fatal injuries tothe baby regardless of the severity ofthe collision. It is advisable to carrychildren in an appropriate restraintsystem on the rear seat which is themost protected position in the eventof an accident.

WARNING

SEVERE DANGER If youneed to carry a baby on thefront passenger seat in acradle restraint system fac-ing backwards, the passen-ger side airbags (front and

side bags, where provided) must bedeactivated using the setup menu.Check the warning light Fon the in-strument panel. Move the passenger’sseat as far back as possible to avoidcontact between the cradle and thedashboard.

WARNINGOver 1.50 m in height, from the point ofview of restraint systems, children areconsidered as adults and wear the seatbelts normally.

Lineaccessori Fiat includes child restraintsystems for each weight group. These de-vices are recommended having beenspecifically designed for Fiat cars.

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 110

Page 112: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

111

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

GROUP 0 and 0+Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facingbackwards on a cradle seat, which, sup-porting the head, does not induce stresson the neck in the event of sharp decel-eration.The cradle is restrained by the car seatbelts fig. 7 and in turn it must restrain thechild with its own belts.

fig. 7 F0R0092m

The figures are indicative for assembly purposes only. Refer to the in-structions supplied with the child restraint.

WARNING

Some child restraint systems for weight group 0 and 1 have a rear at-tachment to the car seat belts and its own seat belts for securing the child.

Due to their weight, they may be dangerous if incorrectly mounted (e.g. if fastenedto the car seat belts with a cushion in between). Follow the assembly instructionscarefully.

WARNING

fig. 8 F0R0093m fig. 9 F0R0094m

GROUP 2

Children from 15 to 25 kg may use the carseat belts directly fig. 9. The child seat isonly needed to position the child correctlywith respect to the belts so that the di-agonal section crosses the child’s chestand never the neck and is snug on the hipsnot the abdomen.

GROUP 1

Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, chil-dren may be carried facing forwards, withseat fitted with front cushion, throughwhich the car seat belt restrains both childand seat fig. 8.

The figure is indicative forassembly purposes only. Re-

fer to the instructions supplied withthe child restraint.

WARNING

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 111

Page 113: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

112

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

GROUP 3

For children from 22 kg to 36 kg the sizeof the child’s chest no longer requires asupport to space the child’s back from theseat back.

Fig. 10 shows proper child seat posi-tioning on the rear seat.

Children taller than 1.50 m can wear seatbelts like adults.

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’SSEAT USE

The car complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC which governs thearrangement possibilities for child restraints on the various seats of the car as shownin the following table:

fig. 10 F0R0095m

The figure is indicative forassembly purposes only. Re-

fer to the instructions supplied withthe child restraint.

WARNING

Weight Passenger Passenger PassengerGroup group front rear rear

central

Group 0, 0+ up to 13 kg U (▼) U *

Group 1 9-18 kg U (▼) U *

Group 2 15-25 kg U (▼) U *

Group 3 22-36 kg U (▼) U *

Key:

U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to Eu-ropean Standard EEC-R44 for the specified “Groups”.

(▼) on cars not fitted with passenger’s seat adjustable in height, the seat back shall bepositioned perfectly upright.

* Never mount child restraint systems on the rear central seat.

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 112

Page 114: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

113

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

Below is a summary of the rules ofsafety to be followed for carryingchildren:

1) The recommended position for in-stalling child’s seat is on the rear seat, asit is the most protected in the case of acrash.

2) If the passenger’s air bag is deactivat-ed always check the amber warning lighton the cluster to make sure that it has ac-tually been deactivated.

3) Carefully follow the instructions sup-plied with the child restraint system whichare mandatory by law. Keep the instruc-tions in the car along with the other pa-pers and this handbook. Do not use childseats without instructions.

4) Always check the seat belt is well fas-tened by pulling the webbing.

5) Only one child is to be strapped toeach retaining system.

6) Always check the seat belts do not fitaround the child’s throat.

7) While travelling, do not let the childsit incorrectly or release the belts.

8) Never carry children on your lap, evennewborns. No-one, however strong, canhold a child in the case of an accident.

9) In case of an accident, replace thechild’s seat with a new one.

Do not place a cradle seatfacing backwards on the

front seat if the passenger side airbagis on. Deployment of the airbag in anaccident could cause fatal injuries tothe baby regardless of the severity ofthe collision. It is advisable to carrychildren in an appropriate restraintsystem on the rear seat which is themost protected position in the eventof an accident.

WARNING

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 113

Page 115: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

114

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S“UNIVERSAL ISOFIX”CHILD RESTRAINTASSEMBLY SETUP

This car is preset for mounting the Uni-versal Isofix child restraint system, a newEuropean standardised system for carry-ing children safely.

An example of child seat is shown as anexample in fig. 11.

The Universal Isofix child’s seat coversweight group: 1.

Due to its different anchoring system, theUniversal Isofix child’s seat shall be an-chored to the proper lower metal ringsA-fig. 12, set between rear seat back andcushion. The upper belt (provided withthe child’s seat) shall be then secured toring B-fig. 13 set in the boot at child’s seatlevel.

It is possible to mount at the same timeboth the traditional restraint system andthe “Universal Isofix” one.

Remember that in case of Universal Isofixchild’s seat, you can only use all thoseseats approved with the marking EECR44/03 “Universal Isofix”.

fig. 12 F0R0097m

fig. 11 F0R0096m fig. 13 F0R0098m

Fit the child seat when thecar is stationary. The child

seat is correctly anchored to thebrackets when you hear the click. Fol-low the instructions for assembly, dis-assembly and positioning that themanufacturer must supply with thechild seat.

WARNINGUniversal Isofix “Duo Plus” child seat isavailable from Lineaccessori Fiat.

For any further installation/use detail, re-fer to the “Instructions Manual” that mustbe provided by the child restraint systemManufacturer.

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 114

Page 116: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

115

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

FRONT AIRBAGS

The car is provided with front airbags forthe driver and the passenger.

The front driver / passenger air bags havebeen designed to protect the occupants inthe event of head-on crashes of medium-high severity, by placing the cushion be-tween the occupant and the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Front air bags are designed to protectcar’s occupants in front crashes and there-fore non-activation in other types of col-lisions (side collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) is not a system malfunction.

An electronic control unit will make thebag inflate in the event of a frontal crash.The bag will inflate instantaneously placingitself between the front occupant’s bodyand the structures which could cause in-jury. It will deflate immediately afterwards.

Driver and passenger front airbags are nota replacement of but complementary tothe belts, which you are recommended toalways wear, as specified by law in Europeand most non-European countries.

The volume of front air bags at max. in-flation fills most of the space between thesteering wheel and the driver and between the dashboard and the passenger.

E

E

D

C

D

C

B

B1

A

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ONUNIVERSAL ISOFIX CHILD’S SEAT USE

The table below, according to EKE 16 European Directive, shows the different instal-lation possibilities of Isofix restraint systems on seats fitted with Universal Isofix fas-teners.

Weight group Orientation Class Isofix position child seat Isofix size rear side

Group 0 0 to 10 kg

Group 0+ 0 to 13 kg

Group 1to 9 up to 18 kg

IUF: suitable for Isofix child restraint systems to be set facing forwards, universal class(fitted with third upper fastener), approved for the weight group.

IL: suitable for special child restraint systems. Isofix type suitable and tested for this typeof car. The seat may be installed by moving the front seat forward.

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IUF

IUF

IUF

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing forwards

Facing forwards

Facing forwards

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 115

Page 117: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

116

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAGfig. 15

It consists of an instant-inflating cushioncontained into a special recess in thedashboard, this cushion has a volume big-ger than that of the driver.

fig. 14 F0R0099m

fig. 15 F0R0100m

The airbags are not deployed in the eventof collisions of low severity (for which thewithholding action of the seat belts is suf-ficient). For this reason, the seat belt mustbe worn at all times. In the case of sidecollisions, the seat belts hold occupants inthe correct position and prevent beingthrown out of the car by a very violentcollision.

DRIVER’S FRONT AIR BAG fig. 14

It consists of an instant-inflating cushioncontained in a special recess in the cen-tre of the steering wheel.

Do not apply stickers or oth-er objects on the steering

wheel, passenger side airbag cover orside upholstery on roof. Do not placeobjects on the passenger side dash-board because these could interferewith the correct opening of the airbag(e.g. mobile phones) and cause severeinjury to occupants.

WARNINGIn the event of a collision, a person notwearing a seat belt may be thrown for-ward and con into contact with the bagbefore it has fully opened. The protectionoffered by the cushion is reduced in sucha case.

Front air bag may not be activated in thefollowing situations:

❒ in collisions against highly deformableobjects not affecting the car front sur-face (e.g. bumper collision against guardrail, etc.);

❒ jamming of the car underneath othervehicles or protective barriers (e.g. un-derneath a truck or a guard rail); in thiscase, the bags would offer no addition-al protection with respect to the seatbelt and their deployment is unneces-sary. No deployment in such cases isconsequently not the sign of a fault.

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 116

Page 118: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

117

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

MANUAL DEACTIVATION OFPASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG AND SIDE BAG (where provided)

Should it be absolutely necessary to car-ry a child on the front seat, the passenger’sfront air bag and the Side Bag (where pro-vided) can be deactivated.

The instrument panel warning light Fwill stay on glowing steadily until reacti-vating the passenger’s front air bag and theSide Bag (where provided).

SEVERE DANGER: Do notarranged cradle child re-straints facing backwards ifthe passenger’s airbag is on.Deployment of the airbag inan accident could cause fa-

tal injuries to the baby. Always deac-tivate the passenger’s airbag whenplacing a child seat on the front seat.Move the passenger’s seat as far backas possible to avoid contact betweenthe cradle and the dashboard. Al-though this is not mandatory by law,the airbag should be immediately re-activated when children are no longercarried to ensure better protection toadults.

WARNING

To deactivate the passen-ger’s front air bag and the

Side Bag (where provided), refer toparagraphs “Digital display” and“Multifunctional display” in section“Dashboard and controls”.

WARNING

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 117

Page 119: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

118

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SSIDE AIRBAGS

The car is fitted with front side bags fordriver and passenger (where provided) forprotecting the chest and window bags(where provided) for protecting front andrear passengers’ head.

Side bags (where provided) protect caroccupants from side crashes of medium-high severity, by placing the cushion be-tween the occupant and the internal partsof the side structure of the car.

Non-activation of side bags in other typesof collisions (front collisions, rear shunts,roll-overs, etc...) is not a system malfunc-tion.

In case of side crash, an electronic controlunit, when required triggers the inflationof the cushion. The cushion immediatelyinflates, placing itself as a protection, be-tween the occupant’s body and the struc-ture that could cause injuries. Immediate-ly after, the cushion deflates.

Side bags (where provided) are not a re-placement of but complementary to thebelts, which you are recommended to al-ways wear, as specified by law in Europeand most non-European countries.

FRONT SIDE BAGS - CHESTAND PELVIS ZONEPROTECTION fig. 16(where provided)

Front side bags are housed in the seat backrests, they consist of an instant inflationcushion designed to increase protectionof the occupants’ chest and pelvis zone inthe event of a side crash of medium-highseverity.

SIDE WINDOW BAGS - HEADPROTECTION fig. 17 (where provided)

They consist of two “drop-down” cush-ions, one on the right and the other on theleft side of the car, located behind the sidecoverings of the roof and covered byproper finishing.

Window bags have been designed for pro-tecting the head of front and rear occu-pants in the event of side crash, thanks tothe wide cushion inflation surface.

IMPORTANT In the event of side crash,you can obtain the best protection by thesystem keeping a correct position on theseat, allowing thus a correct window bagunfolding.

fig. 16 F0R0153m fig. 17 F0R0102m

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 118

Page 120: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

119

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

IMPORTANT The front air bags and/orside bags may be deployed if the car is sub-ject to heavy knocks or accidents involv-ing the underbody area, such as for ex-ample violent shocks, against steps, kerbsor low obstacles, falling of the car in bigholes or sags in the road.

IMPORTANT A small amount of dust willbe released when the airbags are de-ployed. The dust is not harmful and doesnot indicate the beginning of a fire. Fur-thermore, the surface of the deployed bagand the interior of the car may be coveredin a dusty residue: this dust may irritatethe skin and the eyes. Wash with mildsoap and water in the event of exposure.

The expiration date of the explosivecharge and the clock wire are shown on aspecific label contained in the oddmentcompartment. Go to a Fiat Dealershipto have the devices replaced when the ex-piration date approaches.

IMPORTANT Should an accident occur inwhich any of the safety devices is activat-ed, take the car to a Fiat Dealership tohave the devices activated replaced and tohave the system checked.

All inspection, repair and replacement op-erations concerning the air bags must on-ly be carried out c/o Fiat Dealership.

If you are having the car scrapped, havethe air bag system deactivated at a FiatDealership first. If the car changes own-ership, the new owner must be informedof the method of use of air bags and theabove warnings and also be given this“Owner’s Handbook”.

IMPORTANT Pretensioners, front airbagsand front side bags are deployed accord-ing to different logics on the basic of thetype of collision. Non deployment of oneof the devices does not therefore indicatea system fault.

Never rest head, arms andelbows on the door, on the

windows and in the window bag areato prevent possible injuries during in-flation phase.

WARNING

Never lean head, arms andelbows out of window.

WARNING

GENERAL WARNINGS

If when turning the key toMAR the warning light ¬

does not turn on or if it stays on whentravelling (together with the messageon the multifunctional display, whereprovided) there could be a failure insafety systems; in this event air bagsor pretensioners could not trigger incase of impact or, in a minor numberof cases, they could trigger acciden-tally. Contact Fiat Dealership imme-diately to have the system checked.

WARNING

Do not cover the backrest offront and rear seats with

trims or covers that are not suitableto be used with side bags.

WARNING

Never travel with objects onyour lap, in front of your

chest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. be-tween your lips; injury may result inthe event of the air bag being trig-gered.

WARNING

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 119

Page 121: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

120

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SAlways drive holding yourhands on the steering wheel

rim so that the airbag can inflatefreely in the case of need. Do not dri-ve with your body bent forward. Keepyour back straight against the backrest.

WARNING

Airbags may be deployed ifanother vehicle crashes if the

key is inserted and at MAR also if theengine is not running and the car isstationary. For this reason, childrenmust never sit on the front seat, evenif the car is not moving. On the oth-er hand, if the key is inserted and atSTOP, none of the safety devices(airbag or pretensioners) will be de-ployed in a collision. Non deploymentof the devices in this case does not in-dicate a system fault.

WARNING

Do not wash the seats withpressurised water or steam

(by hand or in automatic seat wash-ing stations).

WARNING

The airbag deploymentthreshold is higher than that

of the pretensioners. For collisions inthe range between the two thresh-olds, it is normal for only the preten-sioners to be activated.

WARNING

Do not hook rigid objects tothe coat hooks and to the

support handles.

WARNING

Airbags do not replace seatbelts but increase their effi-

ciency. Furthermore, since frontairbags are not deployed in low speedcollisions, side collisions, rear-endshunts or roll-overs, the occupants areonly protected by the seat belts whichmust be fastened at all times.

WARNING

When the key is turned toMAR warning light F (with

passenger front airbag activate) willblink for a few seconds to remind youthat the airbag will be deployed in theevent of a collision after which itshould go out.

WARNING

Have the airbag systemchecked by a Fiat Dealership

if the car was stolen, if theft was at-tempted, or if the car was subjectedto vandalism or flooding.

WARNING

103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 120

Page 122: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

121

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

ENGINE STARTING ........................................................... 122

PARKING................................................................................ 125

USING THE MANUAL GEARBOX ................................. 126

CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS................................. 127

SNOW TYRES ....................................................................... 131

SNOW CHAINS ................................................................... 131

CAR INACTIVITY ............................................................... 132

CCCOORRRREECCTT UUSSEE OOFF TTHHEE CCAARR

121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 121

Page 123: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

122

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARENGINE STARTING

The car is provided with an electronic en-gine lock device: refer to “The Fiat CODEsystem” paragraph in “Dashboard andcontrols” if you cannot start the engine.

The engine may be noisier during the firstseconds of operation, particularly after along period of inactivity. This is charac-teristic of hydraulic tappets, the timing sys-tem chosen to reduce the number of ser-vicing interventions and does effects nei-ther functionality nor reliability.

It is advisable not to demandmaximum performance fromyour car (e.g. excessive accel-erations, long distances at top

rpm, excessive intense braking, etc.) assoon as the engine is started.

Do not leave the key in the ig-nition switch with the engineoff to avoid unnecessary con-sumption of electricity which

could drain the battery. It is dangerousto run the engine in closed environ-ments.

Running the engine in con-fined areas is extremely dan-

gerous. The engine consumes oxygenand produces carbon monoxidewhich is a highly toxic and lethal gas.

WARNING

Remember that the brakebooster and power steering

are not operational until the enginehas been started, therefore much ef-fort than usual is required on thebrake pedal and steering wheel.

WARNING

STARTING PROCEDURE FOR PETROL VERSIONS

Proceed as follows:

❒ ensure that the handbrake is up;

❒ put the gear lever into neutral;

❒ press the clutch pedal down to thefloor without touching the accelerator;

❒ turn the ignition key to AVV and letit go the moment the engine starts.

If the engine does not start at the first at-tempt, return the ignition key to STOPbefore repeating starting.

121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 122

Page 124: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

123

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

If, when the ignition key is at MAR, the in-strument panel warning light Y remainslit together with warning light U turn thekey to STOP and then back to MAR; re-main on, try with the other keys provid-ed with the car.

IMPORTANT if Y on the instrumentpanel remains on and steady, go to a FiatDealership immediately.

IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition keyto MAR when the engine is off.

STARTING PROCEDURE FORDIESEL VERSIONS

Proceed as follows:

❒ ensure that the handbrake is up;

❒ put the gear lever into neutral;

❒ turn the ignition key to MAR; instru-ment panel warning lights m and Ywill light up;

❒ wait for the warning light Y e mtoturn off. The hotter the engine is, thequicker this will happen;

❒ press the clutch pedal down to thefloor without touching the accelerator;

❒ turn the ignition key to AVV as soonas warning light m goes out. Waitingtoo long will waste the work done bythe glow plugs. Release the key as soonas the engine starts.

If the engine does not start at the first at-tempt, return the ignition key to STOPbefore repeating starting.

If, when the ignition key is at MAR , theinstrument panel warning light Y re-mains lit together with warning light mturn the key to STOP and then back toMAR; if the warning lights remain on, trywith the other keys provided with the car.

IMPORTANT If the instrument panelwarning light Y stays on glowingsteadily, contact immediately Fiat Deal-ership.

IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition keyto MAR when the engine is off.

Warning light m will blinkfor 60 seconds after startingor during prolonged crankingto indicate a fault to the glow

plug heating system. Use the car nor-mally if the engine starts and go to aFiat Dealership as soon as possible.

121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 123

Page 125: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

124

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARSTOPPING THE ENGINE

Turn the ignition to STOP while the en-gine is idling.

IMPORTANT After a taxing drive, youshould allow the engine to “catch itsbreath” before turning it off by letting itidle to allow the temperature in the en-gine compartment to fall.

A quick burst on the acceler-ator before turning off the en-gine serves absolutely nopractical purpose, it wastes

fuel and is damaging especially to tur-bocharged engines.

HOW TO WARM UP THEENGINE AFTER IT HAS JUSTSTARTED (petrol and diesel engines)

Proceed as follows:

❒ drive off slowly, letting the engine turnat medium revs. Do not accelerateabruptly;

❒ do not demand to performance for thefirst few kilometres. Wait until the en-gine coolant gauge starts moving.

Remember that the brakebooster and power steeringare not operational until theengine has been started,

therefore much effort than usual is re-quired on the brake pedal and steeringwheel.

Never jump start the engineby pushing, towing or drivingdownhill. This could cause aflow of fuel into the catalyt-

ic converter and damage it beyond re-pair.

121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 124

Page 126: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

125

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

HANDBRAKE fig. 1

The handbrake lever is located betweenthe two front seats.

Pull the lever upwards to operate thehandbrake. Four or five notches are nor-mally sufficient to lock the car on flat ter-rain, while nine or ten may be necessaryon a steep slope with the car loaded.

IMPORTANT If this is not the case, con-tact Fiat Dealership to have the handbrakeadjusted.

When the handbrake lever is pulled upand the ignition key is at MAR, the in-strument panel warning light x will turnon.

PARKING THE CAR

Proceed as follows:

❒ stop the engine and engage the hand-brake;

❒ engage a gear (on a slope, engage firstgear if the car is faced uphill or reverseif it is faced downhill) and leave thewheels steered.

If the car is parked on a steep slope, it isfurther advisable to block the wheels witha wedge or stone. Do not leave the key inthe ignition switch to prevent draining thebattery. Always remove the key when youleave the car.

Never leave children unat-tended in the car. Always re-

move the ignition key when leavingthe car and take it out with you.

WARNING

fig. 1 F0R0103m

Proceed as followed to release the hand-brake:

❒ slightly lift the handbrake and press re-lease button A;

❒ hold button A pressed and lower thelever. Warning light x on the instru-ment panel will go out.

Press the brake pedal when carrying outthis operation to prevent the car frommoving accidentally.

121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 125

Page 127: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

126

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARUSING THE MANUALGEARBOX

To engage the gears, press the clutch ped-al fully and shift the gear lever into one ofthe required positions (the diagram isshown on the knob fig. 2-3).

IMPORTANT Reverse may only be en-gaged when the car is at a standstill. Withthe engine running, wait for at least 2 sec-onds with the clutch pedal fully pressedbefore engaging reverse to prevent dam-age to the gears and grating.

Version 1.4: to engage reverse R from neu-tral position, lift the sliding ring A underthe knob and shift the lever rightwards andthen back fig. 2.

Version 1.3 Multijet: to engage reverse Rfrom neutral position, shift the lever right-wards and then back fig. 2.

fig. 2 - 1.4 version F0R0154m

Press the clutch pedal fullyto change gears correctly.

For this reason, there must be no ob-stacles on the floor under the pedals:make sure that mat are always flatand do not interfere with the pedals.

WARNING

Do not drive with your handresting on the gear lever asthe force exerted, even ifslight, could lead over time to

premature wear on the gearbox inter-nal components.

IMPORTANT The clutch pedal must beused for gear shift only. Never drive withthe foot resting, even if slightly, on theclutch pedal. For versions / markets whereapplicable, the clutch pedal control elec-tronics can intervene interpreting thewrong drive style as a fault.

fig. 3 - 1.3 Multijet version F0R0105m

121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 126

Page 128: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

127

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

Roof rack/ski rack

Remove the roof rack or the ski rack fromthe roof after use. These accessories de-crease aerodynamic penetration of the carand have a negative effect on consumption.It is better to use a trailer to transportparticularly bulky objects.

Electric devices

Use electric devices only for the amountof time needed. Rear heated window, ad-ditional headlights, windscreen wipers andheater fan need a considerable amount ofenergy, therefore increasing the require-ment of current increases fuel consump-tion (up to +25% in the urban cycle).

Climate control

The climate control system requires high-er fuel consumption (up to +20% in av-erage): use the air vents when the exter-nal temperature allows to.

Spoilers

The use of non-certified aerodynamicitems may adversely affect air drag andconsumption levels.

DRIVING STYLE

Starting

Do not warm the engine up with the carstanding: the engine warms up very slow-ly in these conditions, increasing con-sumption and emissions. It is advisable tostart off immediately and slowly keepingthe engine speed down: the engine willwarm up much faster this way.

Unnecessary actions

Avoid revving up when starting at trafficlights or before stopping the engine. Thelatter action, like doubling the clutch, is un-necessary and causes increase of con-sumption and pollution.

Gear selection

Use a higher gear as soon as traffic androad conditions allow. Using a low gearfor faster acceleration will increase con-sumption.

In the same way improper use of a highgear increases consumption, emissions anengine wear.

CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS

Here are some suggestions which mayhelp you to keep the running costs of yourcar down and lower the amount of toxicemissions released into the atmosphere.

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Car maintenance

Have checks and adjustments carried outin accordance with the “Service schedule”.

Tyres

Check tyre pressure regularly at leastonce every four weeks: excessively lowpressure will increase consumption be-cause rolling resistance will be higher.

Unnecessary loads

Do not travel with too much luggagestowed in the boot. The weight of the car(especially when driving in town) and itstrim greatly affects consumption and sta-bility.

121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 127

Page 129: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

128

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARCONDITIONS OF USE

Cold starting

Short distances and frequent cold start-upswill prevent the engine from reaching op-timal running temperature. Consequently,both consumption (from +15 to +30% onurban cycle ) and emissions will increase.

Traffic and road conditions

Rather high consumption is caused byheavy traffic, for instance when travellingin a queue with frequent use of low gearsor in cities with many traffic lights. Moun-tain and rough roads also have a negativeeffect on consumption.

Traffic hold-ups

During prolonged hold-ups (level crossings)the engine should be switched off.

TOWING TRAILERS

IMPORTANT NOTES

The car must be provided with a type-ap-proved tow hitch and adequate electricalsystem to tow caravans or trailers. Instal-lation must be performed by specialisedpersonnel who will issue the required pa-pers for travelling on roads.

Install any specific and/or additional rear-view mirrors as specified by law.

Remember that when towing a trailer,steep hills are harder to climb, the brak-ing spaces increase and overtaking takeslonger depending on the overall weight.

Engage a low gear when driving downhill,rather than constantly using the brake.

The weight of the trailer on the car’s towhitch will reduce the loading capacity ofthe car by the same amount. Consider theweight of the car at full load, including ac-cessories and luggage to make sure you donot exceed the maximum towable weight(shown on the log book).

Top speed

Fuel consumption considerably increasesas speed increases. Keep your speed aseven as possible, avoiding unnecessarybraking and acceleration which cause ex-cessive fuel consumption and increaseemissions.

Acceleration

Sudden acceleration has a very negativeeffect on consumptions and emissions: ac-celerate gradually and do not go over themaximum torque ratio.

121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 128

Page 130: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

129

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK

The towing device should be fastened tothe body by specialised personnel accord-ing to any additional and/or integrative in-formation supplied by the Manufacturer ofthe device.

The towing device must meet current reg-ulations with reference to 94/20/EEC Directive and subsequent amendments.

For any version the towing device usedmust match the towable weight of the caron which it is to be installed.

For the electric connection a unified con-nector should be used which is generallyplaced on a special bracket normally fas-tened to the towing device, and a specialECU for external trailer light control shallbe installed on the car.

For the electrical connection, 7 or 13 pin12VDC connection is to be used (CU-NA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards). Followthe instructions provided by the car man-ufacturer and/or the tow hitch manufac-turer.

An electric brake should be supplied di-rectly by the battery through a cable witha cross section of no less than 2.5 mm2.

IMPORTANT Electric brake or other de-vice shall be used with running engine.

In addition to the electrical branches, thecar’s electric system can only be con-nected to the supply cable for an electricbrake and to the cable for an internal light,though not above 15W.

For connections use the preset controlunit with battery cable no less than 2.5mm2.

Respect the speed limits specific for eachcountry for vehicles towing trailers. In allcases, the top speed must not exceed 100km/h.

Fit a suitable towing stabilizer to the trail-er to be towed.

The ABS with which the carmay be equipped will not

control the braking system of thetrailer. Particular caution is requiredon slippery roads.

WARNING

Never modify the brakingsystem of the car to control

the trailer brake. The trailer brakingsystem must be fully independentfrom the hydraulic system of the car.

WARNING

121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 129

Page 131: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

130

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARAssembly diagram fig. 3

The tow hook structure must be fastenedin the points shown by the symbol Ø us-ing a total of 6 M8 screws and 2 M10screws.

The internal back plates are to be at least6 mm thick.

The hook should be fastened to the bodyavoiding any type of drilling and trimmingof the rear bumpers that remains visiblewhen the hook is removed.

IMPORTANT It is compulsory to fasten alabel (plainly visible) of suitable size andmaterial with the following wording:

MAX LOAD ON BALL 70 kg

After fitting, screw holesshall be sealed to prevent ex-

haust gas inlet.

WARNING

fig. 3 F0R0190m

Existing hole

Exist

ing

scre

w

To lo

ad

Exist

ing

scre

wEx

istin

g sc

rew

Existing screw

Existing screw

Existing hole

Type-approved ball

121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 130

Page 132: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

131

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

IMPORTANT When snow tyres are usedwith a max speed index below the onethat can be reached by the car (increasedby 5%), place a notice in the passenger’scompartment, plainly in the driver’s viewwhich states the max permissible speed ofthe snow tyres (as per EC Directive).

All four tyres should be the same (brandand track) to ensure greater safety whendriving and braking and better driveability.

Remember that it is inappropriate tochange the direction of rotation of tyres.

SNOW CHAINS

Use of snow chains should be in compli-ance with local regulations.

The snow chains may be applied only on-to the front wheel tyres (drive wheels).Use of Lineaccessori Fiat snow chains isrecommended.

Check the tension of the chains after thefirst few metres have been driven.

IMPORTANT With snow chains, use theaccelerator with extreme care to preventor to limit as much as possible slipping ofthe driving wheels that could cause chainbreaking resulting in damages to the carbody or mechanical components.

IMPORTANT Use low-clearance 9 mmsnow chains.

SNOW TYRES

Use snow tyres of the same size as thenormal tyres provided with the car.

Fiat Dealership will be happy to provideadvice concerning the most suitable typeof tyre for the customer’s requirements.

For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and the specifications of snowtyres, follow the instructions given in para-graph “Wheels” in section “Technicalspecifications”.

The performance of these tyres is con-siderably reduced when the tread depthis less than 4 mm. Replace them in thiscase.

Due to their specific features, the perfor-mance of snow tyres is much lower thanthat of normal types in normal conditionsor long motorway stretches. Limit per-formance according the use for which theywere approved.

The max speed for snowtyres with “Q” marking is

160 km/h; 190 km/h for tyres with “T”marking and 210 km/h for tyres withH marking. The Road Traffic Codespeed limits must however be alwaysstrictly observed.

WARNING

121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 131

Page 133: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

132

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARCAR INACTIVITY

If the car is to be left inactive for longerthan a month, the following precautionsshould be noted:

❒ park the car in covered, dry and if pos-sible well-ventilated premises;

❒ engage a gear;

❒ check that the handbrake is not en-gaged;

❒ disconnect the negative battery termi-nal and check battery charge (see para-graph “Charge level check” in chapter“Maintenance and care”). Repeat thischeck once every three months dur-ing storage. Recharge the battery if nec-essary (see paragraph “If the battery isflat” in chapter “In an emergency”);

❒ clean and protect the painted parts us-ing protective wax;

❒ clean and protect the shiny metal partsusing special compounds readily avail-able;

❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the rubberwindscreen and rear window wiperblades and lift them off the glass;

❒ slightly open the windows;

❒ cover the car with a fabric or perfo-rated plastic terrapin. Do not use com-pact plastic sheets which do not allowhumidity to evaporate from the surfaceof the car;

❒ inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above the nor-mal specified pressure and check it atintervals;

❒ if you don’t disconnect the battery fromthe electric system, check its chargeevery month (see paragraph “Chargelevel check” in chapter “Maintenanceand care”);

❒ recharge the battery if necessary (seeparagraph “If the battery is flat” in chap-ter “In an emergency”);

❒ do not drain the engine cooling system.

IMPORTANT Where relevant, switch offthe car alarm with the remote control.

Keep your speed down whensnow chains are fitted. Donot exceed 50 km/h. Avoidpotholes, steps and pave-ments and avoid also to dri-ve for long distances on

roads not covered with snow to pre-vent damaging the car and theroadbed.

WARNING

Chains cannot be applied totyre 205/45 R17 88V.

WARNING

121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 132

Page 134: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

133

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

GENERAL WARNINGS ..................................................... 134

LOW BRAKE FLUID ............................................................ 134

HANDBRAKE ON................................................................ 134

AIR BAG FAILURE................................................................ 135

HOTENGINE COOLANT ........................................................... 135

LOW BATTERY CHARGE ................................................. 136

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE.......................................... 136

INCOMPLETE DOOR LOCKING.................................... 137

SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED.......................................... 137

EBD SYSTEM FAILURE ........................................................ 137

INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE (DIESEL VERSIONS) ............................................................ 138

EOBD SYSTEM FAILURE (PETROL VERSIONS) ......... 138

FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG DEACTIVATED........... 139

ABS SYSTEM FAILURE......................................................... 139

FUEL RESERVE....................................................................... 139

GLOW PLUG WARMING ................................................ 140

GLOW PLUG WARMING FAILURE ............................... 140

WATER IN DIESEL FUEL FILTER ..................................... 140

FIAT CODE PROTECTION SYSTEM FAILURE.................................................................. 140

EXTERNAL LIGHTS FAILURE........................................... 141

REAR FOG LIGHTS.............................................................. 141

GENERIC FAILURE INDICATION ................................. 141

ESP SYSTEM FAILURE ........................................................ 142

BRAKE PAD WEAR ............................................................ 142

PARKING SENSOR FAILURE ............................................ 143

SIDELIGHTS AND LOW BEAMS ..................................... 143

FOLLOW ME HOME........................................................... 143

FRONT FOG LIGHTS ........................................................ 143

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR........................ 143

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR.................... 143

CRUISE CONTROL ............................................................ 143

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS............................................... 143

POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ON THE ROAD ........... 144

LIMITED RANGE ................................................................. 144

ASR SYSTEM ......................................................................... 144

WWWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS AANNDD MMEESSSSAAGGEESS

133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 133

Page 135: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

134

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

WARNING LIGHTSAND MESSAGES

GENERAL WARNINGSLighting of a warning light is associated toa specific message and/or buzzer when ap-plicable. These indications are brief andprecautionary and as such must non beconsidered as exhaustive and/or alterna-tive to the information contained in theOwner’s Handbook, which you are rec-ommended to read carefully in all cases.Refer to the information in this chap-ter in the event of a failure indication.IMPORTANT Failure indications on thedisplay fall into either of two categories:serious faults and less serious faults.Very serious failures are indicated by arepeated and prolonged warning “cycle”.Less serious failures are indicated by a lim-ited warning “cycle”.Press MENU ESC to stop the warningcycle in both cases. The warning light onthe instrument panel will stay on until thecause of the fault is eliminated.

LOW BRAKE FLUIDLEVEL (red)

HANDBRAKE ON (red)

Turning the ignition key to MAR thewarning light turns on, but it should go offafter few seconds.

Low brake fluid level

The warning light turns on when the lev-el of the brake fluid in the reservoir fallsbelow the minimum level, due to possi-ble leak in the circuit.

On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.

x

If the warning light x turnson when travelling (on cer-

tain versions together with the mes-sage on the display) stop the car im-mediately and contact Fiat Dealer-ship.

WARNING

Handbrake on

The warning light turns on when the hand-brake is on.

On certain versions, if the car is movingthe buzzer will also sound.

IMPORTANT If the warning light turns onwhen travelling, check that the handbrakeis not engaged.

133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 134

Page 136: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

135

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

AIR BAG FAILURE (red)

Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go off after few seconds.

The warning light stays on steady if thereis a failure in the airbag system.

On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.

¬ If when turning the key toMAR the warning light ¬

does not turn on or if it stays on whentravelling (together with the messageon the multifunctional display, whereprovided) there could be a failure insafety systems; in this event air bagsor pretensioners may not be deployedin case of impact or, in a minor num-ber of cases, they be deployed acci-dentally. Contact Fiat Dealership im-mediately to have the system checked.

WARNING

Failure of warning light ¬(warning light off) is indicat-

ed by warning light F which willblink for longer than the normal 4seconds indicating that the front pas-senger airbag is off.

WARNING

HOT ENGINECOOLANT (red)

Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go off after few seconds.

The warning light turns on when the en-gine is overheated.

If the warning light comes on, proceed asfollows:

❒ during normal travel: stop the car,stop the engine and check that the wa-ter level in the vessel is not under theMIN line. In this case, wait for a fewminutes for the engine to cool downwhen slowly and carefully open thecap, top-up with coolant and checkthat the level is between the MIN andMAX references on the vessel itself.Also check for leakages. Go to a FiatDealership if the warning should comeon when the engine is started again.

ç

133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 135

Page 137: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

136

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

LOW ENGINE OILPRESSURE (red)

Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go out as soon as the engine isstarted.

On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.

v

If the warning light vturns on when the car is trav-

elling (on certain versions togetherwith the message on the display) stopthe engine immediately and contacta Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

❒ In the case of demanding use (e.g.towing trailers uphill or car at fullload): slow down and stop the car ifthe warning light stays on. Stand for2 or 3 minutes with the engine runningand slightly accelerated to promote abetter circulation of coolant. Thenstop the engine. Check correct liquidlevel as described above.

IMPORTANT Under severe use of thecar, keep the engine on and slightly accel-erated for few minutes before switching itoff.

On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.

LOW BATTERYCHARGE (red)

Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go out as soon as the engine isstarted (with the engine running at idlespeed a brief delay in going out is allowed).

Go to a Fiat Dealership immediately if thewarning light stays on either steady orblinking.

w

133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 136

Page 138: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

137

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INCOMPLETE DOORLOCKING (red)

On certain versions the warn-ing light turns on when one or moredoors or the tailgate are not properlyshut.

On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.

A buzzer will sound when doors/tailgateare open and the car is moving.

´EBD FAILURE(red) (amber)

Warning lights x and > lit at the sametime with the engine running indicates anEBD system failure or that the system isnot available. Early locking of the rearwheels may occur in the event of violentbraking causing the car to swerve. Drivevery carefully to a Fiat Dealership to havethe system inspected.

On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.

x >SEAT BELTS NOTFASTENED (red)

The warning light on the displaywill light up when the car is moving and thedriver’s seat belt is not correctly fastened.The warning light will blink and a buzzer willsound if the front seat belts are not cor-rectly fastened. The buzzer of the S.B.R.(Seat Belt Reminder) system may only beswitched off by a Fiat Dealership. On someversions the system may be reactivatedfrom the setup menu.

<

133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 137

Page 139: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

138

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

Go to a Fiat Dealership assoon as possible if warninglight U either does not lightup when the key is turned to

MAR to if while travelling the warninglights comes on either steady or blink-ing (along with a message on the dis-play). The operation of warning lightU may be checked by the traffic po-lice using specific devices. Follow thelaws in force in the country where youare driving.

If the light flashes, release the acceleratorpedal to lower the speed of the engine un-til the warning light stops flashing; contin-ue the journey at moderate speed, tryingto avoid driving conditions that may causefurther flashing and contact Fiat Dealer-ship as soon as possible.

EOBD ENGINE CONTROLSYSTEM FAILURE

Under normal conditions, turning the ig-nition key to MAR, the warning light turnson but it should go off after engine starting.This indicates that the warning light isworking correctly. If the warning light ei-ther stays on or comes on while travelling:

❒ steady light: a fault in the supply/ignitionsystem which could cause high emis-sions at the exhaust, possible lack ofperformance, poor handling and highconsumption levels.

On certain versions the dedicated mes-sage is displayed.

In these conditions, you may continuetravelling at moderate speed without de-manding excessive effort from the engine.Prolonged use of the car with the warn-ing light on may cause damage. Go to aFiat Dealership as soon as possible. Ifwarning light will go out after the faultgoes away but it will be stored in the sys-tem.

❒ blinking: indicates the possibility ofdamage to the catalyser (see “EOBDsystem” in section “Dashboard andcontrols”).

INJECTION SYSTEMFAILURE(Multijet versions - amber)

EOBD SYSTEMFAILURE (petrolversions - amber)

Injection system failure

Under normal conditions, turning the ig-nition key to MAR, the warning light turnson but it should go off after engine start-ing.

If the warning light stays on or turns onwhen travelling, means a fault in the sup-ply/ignition system which could cause highemissions at the exhaust, possible lack ofperformance, poor handling and high con-sumption levels.

On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.

In these conditions, you may continuetravelling at moderate speed without de-manding excessive effort from the engine.Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possi-ble.

U

133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 138

Page 140: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

139

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

KFUEL RESERVE (amber)

Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go off after few seconds.

The warning light turns on when about 7litres fuel are left in the tank.

IMPORTANT The warning light will blinkto indicate a system failure. Go to a FiatDealership to have the system checked.

ABS SYSTEM FAILURE(amber)

Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go off after few seconds.

The warning light will light up when thesystem is either not working or not avail-able. In the case, the braking system willwork as normal without the extra poten-tials offered by the ABS system. Drivecarefully and go to a Fiat Dealership assoon as possible.

On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.

>FFRONT PASSENGERAIRBAGDEACTIVATED(amber)

Warning light F comes on when frontpassenger’s airbag is deactivated.

With front passenger’s airbag on, turningthe ignition key to MAR, warning lightF comes on steadily for about 4 sec-onds, it flashes for other 4 seconds andthen it shall go off.

Warning light F indicatesfailure of warning light ¬.

This condition is indicated by inter-mittent blinking of warning light Ffor longer than 4 seconds. In this case,warning light ¬ may not indicatefault to the system. Contact FiatDealership immediately to have thesystem checked before driving off.

WARNING

133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 139

Page 141: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

140

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

GLOW PLUGWARMING (Multijet versions - amber)

GLOW PLUGWARMING FAILURE (Multijet versions - amber)

Glow plug warming

The warning light will go on when the keyis turned to MAR. It will go out as soonas the glow plugs have reached a prede-termined temperature. Start the engine assoon as the warning light goes out.

IMPORTANT With hot ambient temper-ature, warning light stays on for very shorttime.

Glow plug warming failure

The warning light will blink in the eventof a failure to the glow plug heating sys-tem. Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon aspossible.

On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.

m

WATER IN DIESELFUEL FILTER (Multijet versions - amber)

Turning the ignition key to MAR thewarning light turns on, but it should go offafter few seconds.

The warning light turns on when there iswater in the diesel fuel filter.

On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.

c

The presence of water in thefeeding circuit may cause se-vere damage to the injectionsystem and irregular engine

operation. If warning light c lights up(on some versions with the message onthe display), go to a Fiat Dealership assoon as possible to have the systembled. Water may have been introducedin the tank if this appears immediate-ly after refuelling: in this case, stop the engine immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership.

CAR PROTECTIONSYSTEM FAILURE -FIAT CODE (amber)

Turning the key to MAR the warning lightshall flash only once and then go off.

If with the ignition key at MAR, the warn-ing light stays on, this indicates a possiblefailure (see “Fiat Code system” in section“Dashboard and controls”).

IMPORTANT Warning lights U and Ywill come on at the same time to indicatea Fiat CODE system failure.

If with the engine running the warning lightY flashes, this means that the car is notprotected by the engine inhibitor device(see “Fiat Code system” in section “Dash-board and controls”).

Contact Fiat Dealership to have all the keystored.

Y

133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 140

Page 142: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

141

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

GENERIC FAILUREINDICATION (amber)

The warning light turns on in the follow-ing circumstances.

Engine oil pressure sensor failureThe warning light turns on when failure isdetected in parking sensors. Go to a FiatDealership to have the fault fixed as soonas possible.

External light fault (where provided)

See description of warning light 6.

Fuel cut-off switch trippedThe warning light comes on when the fu-el cut-off switch trips.

The display will show the dedicated mes-sage.

èEXTERNAL LIGHTFAILURE (amber)

The warning light will come on(some versions only) when a fault

to one of the following lights is detected:

– side/taillights

– brake lights

– rear fog lights

– direction indicators

– number plate lights.

The fault may be caused by: one or moreburnt lamps, a blow protection fuse or in-terruption of the electrical connection.

On certain versions warning light ècomes on instead.

On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.

W

REAR FOG LIGHTS(amber)

The warning light comes onwhen the rear fog lights are turned on.

4

Rain sensor failure (where provided)The warning light comes on when a rainsensor failure is detected. Go to a FiatDealership.The display will show the dedicated mes-sage.

Parking sensor failure (where provided)See description of warning light t.

Speed limit exceeded (where provided)

The display will show the dedicated mes-sage when the car exceeds the set speedlimit (see “Multifunctional Display” in sec-tion “Dashboard and controls”).

Diesel filter failure (where provided)The warning light will come on when adiesel filter system failure is detected. Thedisplay will show the dedicated message(where provided).

133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 141

Page 143: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

142

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

ESP SYSTEM FAILURE (amber)

HILL HOLDER FAILURE (amber)

ESP system failure

Turning the ignition key to MAR thewarning light turns on, but it should go offafter few seconds.

If the warning light does not go off or stayson when travelling together with the but-ton led ASR OFF, contact Fiat Dealer-ship.

On certain versions the dedicated mes-sage is displayed.

Note Warning light flashing when drivingindicates that the ESP system is active.

Hill Holder failure

Turning the ignition key to MAR thewarning light turns on, but it should go offafter few seconds.

The warning light will come on when a HillHolder system failure is detected.

On certain versions the dedicated mes-sage is displayed.

áBRAKE PAD WEAR(amber) (red)

The warning light on the dialturns on if the front brake pads are worn;in this case have them changed as soonas possible.

On certain versions the dedicated mes-sage is displayed.

dDiesel particulate filter clogged(Multijet versions)

The warning light turns on when thediesel particulate filter is clogged and thedriving conditions do not enable to acti-vate automatically the regeneration pro-cedure.

To allow the regeneration procedure,keep the car running until the warning lightturns off.

The display will show the dedicated mes-sage.

133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 142

Page 144: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

143

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

PARKING SENSORFAILURE (where provided) (amber)

The warning light turns on when failureis detected in parking sensors.

On certain versions warning light ècomes on instead.

Contact Fiat Dealership.

On certain versions the dedicated mes-sage is displayed.

tSIDE/TAILLIGHTS AND LOW BEAMS(green)

FOLLOW ME HOME(green)

Side/taillights and low beams

The warning light turns on when side/tail-lights or low beams are turned on.

Follow me home

The warning light will turn when this de-vice is active (see “Follow me home” insection “Dashboard and controls”).

The display will show the dedicated mes-sage.

3

FRONT FOG LIGHTS(green) (where provided)

The warning light turns onwhen the front fog lights are turned on.

5

LEFT-HANDDIRECTIONINDICATOR(green - intermittent)

The warning light turns on when the di-rection indicator control lever is moveddownwards or, together with the right in-dicator, when the hazard warning lightbutton is pressed.

F

RIGHT-HANDDIRECTIONINDICATOR (green - intermittent)

The warning light turns on when the di-rection indicator control lever is movedupwards or, together with the left indica-tor, when the hazard warning light buttonis pressed.

D

CRUISE CONTROL(where provided) (green)

Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go off after few seconds.

The warning light turns on together withthe message on the display when turningthe knurled ring of the Cruise Control toON.

On certain versions the dedicated mes-sage is displayed.

Ü

MAIN BEAMS (blue)

The warning light turns onwhen the main beams are

turned on.

1

133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 143

Page 145: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

144

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

ASR SYSTEM (versions with multifunction display)

The ASR system can be turned off bypressing the button ASR OFF.

A dedicated message will appear on thedisplay to inform the driver that the sys-tem has been switched off. The LED onthe button will light up at the same time.

POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICEON THE ROAD (versions with multifunction display)

This indication starts flashing when theoutside temperature reaches or falls be-low 3°C to warn the driver of the possi-ble presence of ice on the road.

The display will show the dedicated mes-sage.

LIMITED RANGE (versions with multifunction display)

The display will show the dedicated mes-sage to warn the driver that the cruisingrange is less than 50 km.

Press ASR OFF again: the LED on thebutton will go out and a dedicated mes-sage will appear on the display to informuses that the system has been switchedback on.

133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 144

Page 146: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

145

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STARTING THE ENGINE ................................................. 146

IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED ............................................... 147

QUICK TYRE REPAIR KIT FIX & GO automatic............................................................. 153

WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB ................... 158

IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT.......................... 160

IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT .......................... 165

IF A FUSE BLOWS................................................................ 168

IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT .................................................. 174

LIFTING THE CAR............................................................... 175

TOWING THE CAR ........................................................... 175

IIINN AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 145

Page 147: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

146

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STARTING THE ENGINE

EMERGENCY START-UP

Go to a Fiat Dealership immediately if in-strument panel warning light Y comeson steady.

JUMP STARTING fig. 1

If the battery is flat, the engine may bestarted using an auxiliary battery with thesame capacity or a little higher than theflat one.

Proceed as follows to start the engine:

❒ connect positive terminals (+ near theterminal) of the two batteries with ajump lead;

❒ with a second lead, connect the nega-tive terminal (–) of the auxiliary batteryto an earthing point E on the engine orthe gearbox of the car to be started;

❒ start the engine;

❒ when the engine has been started, re-move the leads reversing the orderabove.

If after a few attempts the engine does notstart, do not insist but contact the near-est Fiat Dealership.

This procedure must be per-formed by expert personnel

because incorrect actions may causeelectrical discharge of considerable in-tensity. Furthermore, battery fluid ispoisonous and corrosive: avoid contactwith your skin and eyes. Keep nakedflames away from the battery. Nosmoking. Do not cause sparks.

WARNING

fig. 1 F0R0242m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 146

Page 148: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

147

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IMPORTANT Never connect the negativeterminals of the two batteries directly:sparks could ignite explosive gas releasedfrom the battery. If the auxiliary battery isinstalled on another car, prevent acciden-tal contact between metallic parts of thetwo cars.

BUMP STARTING

Never jump start the engine by pushing,towing or driving downhill. This couldcause a flow of fuel into the catalytic con-verter and damage it beyond repair.

IMPORTANT Remember that the brakebooster and the power steering systemare not operating until the engine is start-ed, a greater effort will therefore be re-quired to press the brake pedal or turnthe steering wheel.

REPLACING A WHEEL

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

Wheel changing and correct use of thejack and spare wheel call for some pre-cautions as listed below.

Indicate that the car is sta-tionary according to the laws

in force: hazard lights, triangle, etc.Passengers should leave the car, par-ticularly if it is very loaded and waitfor the wheel to be changed awayfrom on-coming traffic. Apply thehandbrake.

WARNING

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 147

Page 149: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

148

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

The spare wheel is specificfor your car. Do not use it on

cars of different models. Do not usespare wheels of different models onyour car. The wheel bolts are specif-ic for your car. Do not use them oncares of different models. Do not usebolts of different models on your car.

WARNING

Repair and refit the standardwheel as soon as possible.

Do not apply grease to the boltthreading before assembly: the boltscould come loose unexpectedly.

WARNING

The jack may only be used toreplace wheels on the car

which it equips or other cars of thesame model. Never use the jack forother purposes, such as lifting othercar models. Never use the jack to car-ry out repairs under the car. Incorrectpositioning of the jack may cause thecar to fall. Do not use the jack forloads higher than those shown on thelabel.

WARNING

Incorrect wheel cup assem-bly may cause it to come off

when the car is travelling. Never tam-per with the inflation valve. Never in-troduce tools of any kind between rimand tyre. Check tyre and spare wheelpressure regularly referring to the val-ues shown in the “Technical Specifi-cations” chapter.

WARNING

Important notes:

❒ the jack weighs 1.76 kg;

❒ the jack requires no adjustment;

❒ the jack cannot be repaired: replacewith an original spare part if damaged;

❒ no tool other than its handle may be fit-ted on the jack.

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 148

Page 150: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

149

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

To change a wheel proceed asfollows:

❒ stop the car in a position so that it isnot a danger for on-coming traffic andwhere you can replace the wheel safe-ly. The ground must be flat and com-pact;

❒ stop the engine off and pull up the hand-brake;

❒ engage first gear or reverse;

❒ wear the reflecting safety jacket (com-pulsory by law in certain countries) be-fore getting out of the car;

❒ open the tailgate and lift the mat;

❒ loosen the fastener A-fig. 2;

❒ take out the tool box C-fig. 2 and takeit near to the wheel to be changed;

❒ take the spare wheel B-fig. 2;

fig. 2 F0R0107m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 149

Page 151: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

150

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ loosen the bolts of the wheel to be re-placed by about one turn with thewrench provided E-fig. 3; if the car isfitted with alloy rims, shake the car tofacilitate removing the rim from thewheel hub; ❒ operate the device F-fig. 4 to extend

the jack until the top of the jack G-fig.4 fits correctly into catch H-fig. 4;

❒ warn anybody nearby that the car isabout to be lifted. They must stay clearand not touch the car until it is back onthe ground;

❒ fit the handle L-fig. 4 to operate thejack and lift the car until the wheel tobe changed is several centimetres offthe ground;

fig. 3 F0R0108m

fig. 4 F0R0155m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 150

Page 152: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

151

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ for versions with wheel cap, remove thewheel cap after loosening the 3 fasteningbolts and finally loosen the fourth bolt L-fig. 5 and extract the wheel;

❒ make sure the contact surfaces be-tween spare wheel and hub are cleanso that the fastening bolts will not comeloose;

❒ fit the spare wheel by inserting the firstbolt for two threads into the hole clos-est to the inflation valve;

❒ fit the wheel cap making the crescenthole coincide with the bolt you have fit-ted using the wrench;

❒ tighten the fastening bolts;

❒ turn the jack handle L-fig. 4 to lowerthe car and remove the jack;

❒ use the wrench provided to fasten thebolts completely in a criss-cross fashionas shown in fig. 6;

❒ if replacing a wheel with alloy rim, stoveit temporarily into the spare wheelcompartment with the cosmetic sidefacing upwards.

REFITTING THESTANDARD WHEEL

Following the procedure described previ-ously, raise the car and remove the sparewheel.

fig. 5 F0R0156m fig. 6 F0R0157m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 151

Page 153: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

152

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

Versions with steel rims

Proceed as follows:

❒ make sure the contact surfaces be-tween spare wheel and hub are cleanso that the fastening bolts will not comeloose;

❒ fit the standard wheel by inserting thefirst bolt for two threads into the holeclosest to the inflation valve;

❒ fit the wheel cap making the lunettehole coincide with the bolt you have fit-ted then, fit the other 3 bolts;

❒ using the wrench provided, tighten thefastening bolts;

❒ lower the car and remove the jack;

❒ using the wrench provided, fully tight-en the bolts in the sequence shownpreviously in the figure.

Versions with alloy rims

Proceed as follows:

❒ insert the wheel on the hub and usingthe wrench provided tighten the bolts;

❒ lower the car and remove the jack;

❒ using the wrench provided, fully tight-en the bolts in the sequence shown inthe figure.

When you have finished

❒ stow the spare wheel in the space pro-vided in the boot;

❒ fit the jack partially open in its box C-fig. 2 forcing it lightly to prevent itfrom vibrating when travelling;

❒ put the tools back into their places inthe container;

❒ stow the container C-fig. 2, completewith tools in the spare wheel;

❒ tight the tool box fastener A-fig. 2;

❒ reposition the mat in the boot.

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 152

Page 154: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

153

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

QUICK TYRE REPAIR KITFIX & GO automatic

The Fix & Go automatic quick tyre repairkit is placed in the boot under the mat.

The kit fig. 7 includes:

❒ cylinder A containing sealant and fittedwith:

– filling pipe B;

– an adhesive label C with the mes-sage “max. 80 km/h” to be apply ina position clearly visible by the dri-ver (on the dashboard) after repair-ing the tyre;

❒ instruction booklet (see fig. 8), to beused for prompt and proper use of thequick repair kit and to be then handedto the personnel charged with handlingthe treated tyre;

❒ compressor D-fig. 7 including gaugeand connections;

❒ a pair of protection gloves located inthe side space of the compressor;

❒ adapters for inflating different elements.

fig. 7 F0R0158m

The quick repair kit also contains a screw-driver and a tow ring.

fig. 8 F0R0159m

Hand over the instructionbooklet to the personnel

charged with treating the tyre re-paired with the kit.

WARNING

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 153

Page 155: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

154

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IMPORTANT INFORMATION:

The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repairkit is effective with external temperaturesbetween -20 °C and +50 °C.

The sealing fluid will expire.

Do not operate the com-pressor for longer than 20

consecutive minutes. Risk of over-heating. The quick repair kit is notsuitable for definitive repairs. Thetyres may only be repaired tem-porarily.

WARNING

In the event of a puncturecaused by foreign bodies, thekit may be used to repairtyres showing damages on the

track or shoulder up to max 4 mm di-ameter.

The kit cannot be used to re-pair damage to the tyre side-

wall. Do not use the quick repair kitif the tyre was damaged by runningon a flat.

WARNING

The damage cannot be re-paired with the kit if the

wheel rim is damaged (deformationof the channel causing leakage of air).Do not remove the foreign body(screw or nail) from the tyre.

WARNING

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 154

Page 156: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

155

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

INFLATION PROCEDURE

The cylinder contains ethylglycol. Contains latex: may

cause an allergic reaction. Harmful ifswallowed. Irritant for the eye. Maycause sensitization by inhalation orcontact. Avoid contact with your eyes,skin and clothes. In the event of con-tact, wash immediately with plenty ofwater. Do not induce vomit if swal-lowed. Rinse your mouth and drinkplenty of water. Call a doctor imme-diately. Keep away from children. Theproduct must not be used by asth-matics. Do not breath in the vapoursduring insertion and suction. Call adoctor immediately if allergic reactionsare noted. Store the cylinder in thespecific compartment, away fromsources of heat. The sealing fluid willexpire.

WARNING Replace the cylinder contain-ing the sealant after the ex-piration date. Dispose of thecylinder and the sealant liq-

uid properly. Dispose according to thenational and local laws in force.

Put on the protection glovesprovided together with quick

tyre repair kit.

WARNING

❒ Apply the handbrake. Remove thetyre valve cap, extract the flexible fillertube A-fig. 9 and fasten the ring B on-to the tyre valve;

fig. 9 F0R0109m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 155

Page 157: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

156

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ make sure that switch D-fig. 10 of thecompressor is in position 0 (off), startthe engine, plug into the nearest sock-et E-fig. 11 and operate the compres-sor turning switch D-fig. 10 to positionI (on). Inflate the tyre to the pressurespecified in the “Inflation pressure”paragraph, “Technical Specifications”chapter.

For a more accurate reading, checkpressure gauge F-fig. 10 with thecompressor off;

❒ if after 5 minutes it is still impossibleto reach at least 1.5 bar, disengage com-pressor from valve and current outlet,then move the car forth for approx. tenmetres in order to distribute the seal-ing fluid inside the tyre evenly, then re-peat the inflation operation;

❒ If after this operation it is still impossi-ble after 5 minutes to reach at least 1.8bar, do not start driving since the tyreis excessively damaged and the quicktyre repair kit cannot guarantee suit-able sealing, contact Fiat Dealership;

❒ if reaching the tyre pressure specifiedin paragraph “Inflation pressure” in sec-tion “Technical Specifications”, startdriving immediately;

fig. 10 F0R0160m

fig. 11 F0R0113m

fig. 12 F0R0110m

Apply the adhesive label in aposition clearly visible by the

driver as a reminder that the tyre hasbeen treated with the quick repair kit.Drive carefully, particularly on bends.Do not exceed 80 km/h. Do not ac-celerate or brake suddenly.

WARNING

❒ after driving for about 10 minutes stopand check again the tyre pressure; pullup the handbrake;

Stop if the pressure hasdropped to less than 1.8

bars: the Fix & Go automatic quickrepair kit cannot work properly be-cause the tyre is excessively damaged.Go to a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 156

Page 158: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

157

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ if at least 1.8 bar pressure is read, re-store proper pressure (with enginerunning and handbrake on) and restart;

❒ drive with the utmost care to the near-est Fiat Dealership.

FOR CHECKING ANDRESTORING PRESSURE ONLY

The compressor may also be used forrestoring pressure only. Release couplingA-fig. 14 and connect directly to the tyrevalve fig. 13. In this way, the cylinder willnot be connected to the compressor andno sealant will be injected.

CYLINDER REPLACEMENTPROCEDURE

To replace the cylinder proceed as fol-lows:

❒ release connection A-fig. 14;

❒ turn anticlockwise the cylinder to re-place and raise it;

❒ fit the new cylinder and turn it clock-wise;

❒ connect connection A to the cylinderand fit the transparent tube B into theproper space.

Remember to inform theworkshop that the tyre has

been treated with a quick repair kit.Give the instruction booklet to thetyre repair workshop personnel.

WARNINGfig. 13 F0R0111m fig. 14 F0R0161m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 157

Page 159: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

158

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

❒ When a bulb is not working, check thatthe corresponding fuse is intact beforereplacing it: refer to the “If a fuseblows” paragraph in this chapter forfuse location.

❒ before changing a bulb check the con-tacts for oxidation;

❒ burnt bulbs must be replaced by othersof the same type and power;

❒ always check the height of the headlightbeam after changing a bulb, for reasonsof safety.

IMPORTANT A slight misting may appearon the internal surface of the headlight:this does not indicate a fault and is causedby low temperature and the degree of hu-midity in the air. Misting will rapidly dis-appear when the headlights are switchedon. The presence of drop inside the head-lights indicates infiltration of water. Go toa Fiat Dealership.

TYPES OF BULBS

Various types of bulbs are fitted to your car:

A All glass bulb: clipped into place. Pullto extract.

B Bayonet bulbs: to remove this typeof bulb from its holder, press thebulb and turn it anticlockwise.

C Cylindrical bulbs: release from thecontacts to extract.

D-E Halogen bulbs: release the fasteningclip from the corresponding seat toremove the lamp.

Halogen lamps must be han-dled holding the metallic partonly. Touching the transparentpart of the bulb with your fin-

gers may reduce the intensity of theemitted light and even compromise du-ration of the lamp itself. In the case ofaccidental contact, rub the lamp with acloth and spirit and leave to dry.

Modifications or repairs tothe electrical system (elec-

tronic control units) that are not car-ried out properly or do not take thetechnical specifications of the systeminto account can cause malfunctionsleading to the risk of fire.

WARNING

Halogen bulbs contain pres-surised gas which, if broken,

may cause small fragments of glass tobe projected outwards.

WARNING

fig. 15 F0R0112m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 158

Page 160: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

159

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

Bulb Ref. figure Type Power

Main beam headlights

Dipped beam headlights

Front sidelights

Front fog lights (where provided)

Front direction indicators

Side direction indicators

Rear direction indicators

Side/taillights

Brake lights

Third brake light (additional brake light)

Reversing light

Rear fog lights

Number plate light

Front ceiling light with spot lights

Rear ceiling light with movable lens

Boot light

Puddle light

Courtesy light

Courtesy light

Oddments compartment courtesy light

H1U55W

H755W

W5W

H1U55W

PY21W

WY5W

Y21W

R5W

P21W

5W

P21W

P21W

W5W

10W x 2

10W

W5W

W5W

1.2W x 2

C5W

C5W

D

D

A

B

A

B

B

B

B

A

C

C

A

C

C

C

C

55W

55W

5W

55W

21W

5W

21W

5W

21W

5W

21W

21W

5W

10W

10W

5W

5W

1.2W

5W

5W

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 159

Page 161: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

160

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHTBURNS OUT

For the type of bulb and power rating, see“When needing to change a bulb”.

FRONT LIGHT CLUSTERSfig. 16

The front light clusters contain sidelights,dipped beam, main beam and direction in-dicator bulbs.

The bulbs are arranged inside the light unitas follows:

A main beam

B side lights

C dipped beam (two lights)

D direction indicators.

SIDELIGHTS fig. 17

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

❒ remove the clipped-on cover;

❒ press tabs B and remove the bulbholder;

❒ remove the bulb C and replace it;

❒ refit the bulb holder and refit the capand check that it is locked properly.

fig. 16

C B D

A

F0R0220m fig. 17 F0R0221m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 160

Page 162: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

161

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 18

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

❒ remove the clipped-on cover;

❒ disconnect the central electric connec-tor and release the bulb holder catch;

❒ remove the bulb B and replace it;

❒ fit the new bulb, making the outlines ofthe metallic part coincide with thegrooves on the reflector;

❒ refit the bulb holder catch and reconnectthe electrical connector;

❒ refit the protection and check that itis correctly locked.

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 19

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

❒ remove the clipped-on cover;

❒ disconnect the central electric connec-tor and release the bulb holder catch;

❒ remove the bulb B and replace it;

❒ refit the new bulb;

❒ refit the bulb holder catch and reconnectthe electrical connector;

❒ refit the protection and check that itis correctly locked.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

Front fig. 19/a

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

❒ steer the right/left wheel outwards asshown in the figure;

❒ turn the catch as shown by the arrow,then use the lid;

❒ remove the bulb holder cover by turn-ing it anticlockwise;

fig. 18 F0R0222m fig. 19/a F0R0224mfig. 19 F0R0223m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 161

Page 163: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

162

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ extract the bulb D by pressing it slight-ly and turning it anticlockwise (bayonetlocking) then replace it;

❒ refit the cover/bulb holder C by turningit clockwise and locking it properly;

❒ close the lid and turn the fastening de-vice.

Side fig. 20

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

❒ work on the lens A to compress the in-ternal catch B, then pull the unit out-wards;

❒ turn the bulb holder C anticlockwise,extract the clipped-on bulb D and re-place it;

❒ refit the bulb holder C in the lens andturn it clockwise;

❒ refit the unit making sure that the in-ternal catch B clips into position.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS (where provided)

Contact Fiat Dealership to have front foglights A-fig. 21 replaced.

REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS fig. 22-23Rear light cluster contain taillights, brakelight, direction indicators and rear fog lightbulbs. The bulbs are arranged inside thelight unit as follows:A brake lights (two lights)B taillightsC rear fog lightsD direction indicators E reversing light.

fig. 20 F0R0226m fig. 22

D

A B C

EF0R0227mfig. 21 F0R0114m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 162

Page 164: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

163

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

fig. 23/a F0R0228m

fig. 24 F0R0230m

To change the bulb proceed as follows:

❒ open the tailgate and loosen the two fastening screws G;

❒ disconnect the central electric connector and pull the lens unit out-wards;

❒ release the clips F and extract the bulb holders;

❒ remove the bulb to replace A, B, C or D pushing it slightly andturning it anticlockwise (bayonet-type bulb) and replace it;

❒ refit the bulb holder and refasten the clips F;

❒ to replace the rear fog light, release the clips H-fig. 24, removethe protection and replace the bayonet bulb.

❒ reconnect the electrical connector, reposition the cluster correct-ly on the body and then tighten the fastening screws G.

fig. 23/b F0R0229m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 163

Page 165: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

164

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

THIRD BRAKE LIGHTS

The change the bulb’s group proceed asfollows:

❒ open the tailgate;

❒ disconnect the electric connector A-fig. 25;

❒ unscrew the two laterals pivots B-fig. 25;

❒ extract the bulb hoder;

❒ remove and replace the bulbs fig. 26.

NUMBER PLATE LIGHT fig. 27-28

To change the bulb proceed as follows:❒ work in the point shown by the arrow

and remove lens A-fig. 27;❒ change the bulb fig. 28 releasing it from

the side contacts and making sure thenew bulb is correctly fastened betweenthe contacts;

❒ refit the snap-fitted lens unit.

fig. 25 F0R0252m fig. 26 F0R0253m fig. 27 F0R0123m

fig. 28 F0R0124m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 164

Page 166: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

165

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IF AN INTERIOR LIGHTBURNS OUT

For the type of bulb and power rating, see“When needing to change a bulb”.

FRONT CEILING LIGHT

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

❒ work in the points shown by the ar-rows and remove light A-fig. 29;

❒ open the protection lid B-fig. 30;

❒ replace bulbs C releasing them from theside contacts; make sure that new bulbsare correctly clamped between contacts;

❒ re-close the lid B-fig. 30 and secure lightA-fig. 29 into its housing locking itproperly.

REAR CEILING LIGHT(where provided)

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

❒ work in the points shown by the ar-rows and remove light D-fig. 31;

❒ open the protection lid E-fig. 32;

❒ change the bulb F-fig. 32 releasing itfrom the side contacts and making surethe new bulb is correctly fastened be-tween the contacts;

❒ re-close the protection lid E-fig. 32and secure light D-fig. 31 into its hous-ing locking it properly.

fig. 29 F0R0115m

fig. 30 F0R0117m

fig. 31 F0R0116m

fig. 32 F0R0118m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 165

Page 167: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

166

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

COURTESY LIGHT fig. 33

To change the bulb proceed as follows:

❒ open the mirror cover A;

❒ extract lens B levering in the pointsshown by the arrow;

❒ delicately lift the bulb holder C from itsseat, extract the clipped-on bulb and re-place it;

❒ correctly reposition the bulb holder Cin its seat;

❒ refit the light B inserting it in its cor-rect position firstly on one end andthen on the other until it clicks intoplace.

BOOT LIGHT fig. 34

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ open the tailgate;❒ remove the light A levering in the point

shown by the arrow;❒ open the protection B and replace the

snap-fitted bulb;❒ re-close the protective cover B on the

lens;❒ refit the light A inserting it in its cor-

rect position firstly on one end andthen on the other until it clicks intoplace.

fig. 33 F0R0233m fig. 34 F0R0234m fig. 35 F0R0120m

PUDDLE LIGHTS(where provided) fig. 35-36

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

❒ remove the light by pressing clip A-fig. 35 with a screwdriver;

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 166

Page 168: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

167

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ press the bulb protection cover sides B-fig. 36 on the two fastening pins andturn it;

❒ replace the snap-fitted bulb C-fig. 36;

❒ refit bulb protection cover fitting thetwo fastening pins;

❒ refit the ceiling light inserting first endD-fig. 35 and then pressing the otherend until hearing the locking click of theclip.

fig. 36 F0R0121m

ODDMENTS COMPARTMENTCOURTESY LIGHT (where provided) figs. 37-38

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

❒ work at the points shown by the ar-rows and remove the courtesy light A-fig. 37;

❒ replace the bulb B-fig. 38 releasing itfrom the side contacts and making surethe new bulb is correctly fastened be-tween the actual contacts;

❒ refit the courtesy light A-fig.37 in itshousing making sure that it is secure.

fig. 37 F0R0303m fig. 38 F0R0304m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 167

Page 169: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

168

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IF A FUSE BLOWS

GENERAL

The fuse is a protective device for theelectric system: it comes into action (i.e.it cuts off) mainly due to a fault or im-proper action on the system.

Check the efficiency of the correspondingfuse when a device does not work: theconducting element A-fig. 39 must not beinterrupted. If it is, replace the blown fusewith another with the same amperage(same colour).

B undamaged fuse

C fuse with damaged filament.

fig. 39 F0R0122m

Never replace a fuse withanother of higher amperage:

FIRE RISK.

WARNING

Never replace a blown fusewith metallic wires or othermaterial.

Go to a Fiat Dealership if ageneral protection fuse

blows (MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE,MAXI-FUSE).

WARNING

If a fuse blows again, contacta Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

Remove the key from the ig-nition switch and switch off

all loads before replacing a fuse.

WARNING

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 168

Page 170: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

169

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

FUSE LOCATION

The fuses are grouped in three units onthe dashboard, in the engine compartmentand on the positive battery terminal.

Fuse box on the dashboard fig. 41

To gain access to the fuses in the fuse boxon the dashboard, loosen the fasteningscrews A-fig. 40 and remove the cover.

fig. 41 F0R0126m

F34 F48 F49 F35 F13

F46 F33 F37 F42 F12

F45 F47 F32 F50 F51

F52 F41 F43 F40 F44

F36 F39 F38 F53 F31

fig. 40 F0R0125m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 169

Page 171: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

170

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

Fuse box in engine compartmentfig. 43

To gain access to the fuses in the fuse boxnext to the battery, remove the protec-tion cover fig. 42.

fig. 42 F0R0127m

fig. 43 F0R0128m

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 170

Page 172: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

171

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

7.5

7.5

7.5

15

20

20

7.5

7.5

7.5

20

10

30

7.5

7.5

20

F12

F13

F31

F32

F33

F34

F35

F36

F37

F38

F39

F40

F41

F42

F43

FUSE TABLE

Fuse box on dashboard fig. 41

LOADS FUSE AMPERES

Right dipped beam headlight

Left dipped beam headlight, headlight corrector

INT/A for relay coils (T08, T17) in engine compartment fuse box and body computer node

Heated Seats

Power windows control unit (left rear window motor)

Power windows control unit (right rear window motor)

+15 reversing lights, brake lights control NC, air mass meter, glow plug pre-heating unit, water in diesel fuel sensor, tachometer generator, level sensor 2

Power window unit (+30 for electronics)

+15 instrument panel, NA brake lights control

Body computer node

Radio node, climate control node, node Blue&Me

Heated rear window

Mirror defrosters

+15 brake system

Windscreen wiper control (two-way pump)

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 171

Page 173: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

172

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

LOADS FUSE AMPERES

Cigar lighter or socket

Boot lock actuator

Power window unit (driver’s side front window motor)

Power window unit (passenger’s side front window motor)

+15 control lighting: radio on steering wheel, control panel, power mirrors, power window unit, electrochromic mirror and rain sensor

+15 airbag node

+15 cruise control, radio setup, Blu&Me setup,parking sensors, climate control node

Power window unit, driver’s seat adjustment motor

Body computer and instrument panel node

F44

F45

F47

F48

F49

F50

F51

F52

F53

15

10

20

20

7.5

7.5

7.5

15

7.5

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 172

Page 174: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

173

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

10

10

7.5

7.5

10

10

7.5

15

15

20

10

15

F10

F11

F14

F15

F17

F18

F19

F21

F22

F23

F24

F30

Fuse box in engine compartment fig. 43

LOADS FUSE AMPERES

Horn

Engine control system secondary loads

Right main beam headlight

Left beam headlight

Engine control system primary loads

Engine control unit

Conditioner compressor

Fuel pump

Engine control system primary loads (injectors, ignition coils)

Windscreen wiper motor

Spare

Fog lights

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 173

Page 175: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

174

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT

IMPORTANT The battery recharging pro-cedure is provided as an example only.You are recommended to go to a FiatDealership to have this operation per-formed.

Low amperage slow recharging for ap-proximately 24 hour is advised. Rapid bat-tery charging with high currents coulddamage the battery.

Charge the battery as follows:

❒ disconnect battery negative terminal;

❒ connect the charger cables to the bat-tery terminals, observing the poles;

❒ turn on the charger;

❒ when you have finished, turn the charg-er off before disconnecting the battery;

❒ reconnect battery negative terminal.Battery fluid is poisonousand corrosive: avoid contact

with your skin and eyes. The batteryrecharging operation must be per-formed in a ventilated placed awayfrom naked flames o possible sourcesof sparks to avoid the risk of explo-sion and fire.

WARNING

Never attempt to rechargea frozen battery: defrost it

first to prevent the risk of explosion.If a battery was frozen, have it in-spected by specialised personnel be-fore recharging to check that the in-ternal elements are not damagedand that the casing is not crackedcausing the risk of leakage of poiso-nous, corrosive gas.

WARNING

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 174

Page 176: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

175

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

fig. 42 F0R0129m

LIFTING THE CAR

If the car is to be lifted, go to a Fiat Deal-ership which is equipped with the armhoist or workshop lift.

Lift the car exclusively by positioning thejack arms or the shop jack in the pointsshown in the figure.

TOWING THE CARThe tow ring provided with the car ishoused in the tool box under the bootmat.

The front and rear tow hooksshould only be used on the

roads for emergency operations. Tow-ing is permitted for short journies us-ing the special device that conforms tothe highway code (rigid bar) to movethe vehicle onto the road in prepara-tion for towing or transportation ona special vehicle.The hooks should NOT be used for re-covering the vehicle away from theroad or where there are obstaclesand/or for towing using cables or oth-er non rigid devices. With regard to theabove conditions, towing should takeplace with the two vehicles (the onetowing and the one being towed)aligned as closely as possible along thesame centre line axis.

WARNING

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 175

Page 177: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

176

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

FASTENING THE TOW RING fig. 43-44

Proceed as follows:❒ release the cap A;❒ take the tow hook B from the sup-

port;

❒ tighten the ring on the rear or frontthreaded pin.

The power brakes and pow-er steering will not work while

the car is being towed. More effort onthe brake pedal and steering wheel willtherefore be required. Do not use wiresfor towing. Do not jerk. Make sure notto damage parts in contact with thecar while towing. Respect the specificrules of the Highway Code when tow-ing the car specifically in relation tothe towing device and the behaviourto maintain on the road.

WARNING

fig. 43 F0R0130m

fig. 44 F0R0131m

Do not start the engine whiletowing the car.

WARNING

Clean the threaded seatcarefully before fastening

the ring. Make sure that the ring isfully fastened in the seat before tow-ing the car.

WARNING

Release the steering wheellock before towing (see “Ig-

nition device” in “Dashboard and con-trols”).

WARNING

145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 176

Page 178: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

177

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................ 178

SERVICE SCHEDULE PETROL VERSIONS ............................................................. 179

SERVICE SCHEDULEDIESEL VERSIONS ............................................................... 181

REGULAR INSPECTIONS ................................................. 183

DEMANDING USE OF THE CAR ................................... 183

CHECKING FLUID LEVELS................................................ 184

AIR CLEANER ...................................................................... 190

POLLEN FILTER ................................................................... 190

BATTERY ................................................................................ 190

WHEELS AND TYRES ......................................................... 193

RUBBER HOSES .................................................................... 194

WINDSCREEN WIPERS...................................................... 194

BODYWORK ........................................................................ 196

INTERIORS ............................................................................ 198

CCCAARR MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 177

Page 179: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

178

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

IMPORTANT Scheduled service couponsare required by the manufacturer. Defaultmay cancel the warranty.

Scheduled Servicing is performed by all Fiat Dealership, at pre-established times.

If during each operation, in addition to theones programmed, the need arises for fur-ther replacements or repairs, these maybe carried out only with the explicit agree-ment of the Customer.

IMPORTANT You are advised to contactFiat Dealership in the event of any minoroperating faults, without waiting for thenext service coupon.

If your car is used frequently for towing,the interval between one service couponand the other must be reduced.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance is essential for en-suring long car life under the best condi-tions.

This is why Fiat has planned a series ofchecks and maintenance operations every30,000 km.

Scheduled servicing will not however ful-ly cover all of the need of your car: It ishowever important to remember thatscheduled servicing does not completelycover all the car’s requirements: also inthe initial period before 30,000 km servicecoupon and later, between one couponand another, ordinary care is still requiredsuch as for example routine check andtopping up the level of fluids, tyre pressurecheck, etc.

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 178

Page 180: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

179

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

30 60 90 120 150 180

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

SERVICE SCHEDULE PETROL VERSIONS

Service coupons shall be performed every 30,000 km

Thousands of kilometres

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if required

Check light system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights, boot lights, passenger compartment lights, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)

Check windscreen wiper/washer operation

Check of conditions and wear of pads of front disk brakes

Check of conditions and wear of pads of rear disk brakes (T-JET version)

Check rear drum brake linings and wear

Visually inspect conditions and integrity: bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)

Check cleanness of locks, bonnet and boot and lever cleanness and lubrication

Check tension and adjust accessory drive belts (1.4 with heater)

Visually inspect accessory drive belt conditions

Replace accessory drive belt/s

Check and adjust handbrake lever stroke, if required

Check and adjust tappet clearance, if required

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 179

Page 181: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

180

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

30 60 90 120 150 180

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

Thousands of kilometres

Check exhaust emissions

Replace air cleaner cartridge

Change spark plugs (❍) 1

Top up fluids (engine coolant, brakes, battery, windscreen washer, etc.)

Check timing belt conditions (1.4 and 1.4 T-JET versions)

Check engine control system operation(through diagnosis socket)

Replace timing belt (*)

Change engine oil and oil filter (or every 24 months)

Change brake fluid (or every 24 months) 2

Change pollen filter (or every 24 months)

(*) Regardless of the km covered, the timing belt shall be replaced every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, driving in the city, idling for a long time) or in any case every 5 years

(❍) 1 For 1.4 T-JET version, in order to ensure correct operation and avoid significant damages to the engine, it is mandatory:- to use spark plugs specifically certified for the T-JET engine only, of the same type and brand (see paragraph “Engine”);- to replace the plugs as often as required by the Programmed Maintenance Plan; - we recommend to refer to the Fiat Dealership

2 If the car is mainly used in cities or less than 10,000 km a year, change the engine oil and filter every 12 months.

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 180

Page 182: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

181

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

30 60 90 120 150 180

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

SERVICE SCHEDULE DIESEL VERSIONS

Service coupons shall be performed every 30,000 km

Thousands of kilometres

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if required

Check light system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights, boot lights, passenger compartment lights, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)

Check windscreen wiper/washer operation

Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rearscreen wiper blades

Check front and rear (where provided) disk brake pad conditions and wear

Check rear drum brake linings and wear

Visually inspect conditions and integrity: bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)

Check cleanness of locks, bonnet and boot and lever cleanness and lubrication

Visually inspect accessory drive belt conditions

Replace accessory drive belt/s

Check and adjust handbrake lever stroke, if required

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 181

Page 183: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

182

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

30 60 90 120 150 180

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

Thousands of kilometres

Check exhaust emissions/smoke

Replace fuel filter

Replace air cleaner cartridge

Top up fluids (engine coolant, brakes, battery, windscreen washer, etc.)

Check engine control system operation(through diagnosis socket)

Replace the distribution control toothed belt (*)(1.6 Multijet versions)

Change engine oil and replace oil filter (or every 24 months)

Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)

Change pollen filter (or every 24 months)

* Regardless of the mileage, the timing belt must be changed every 4 years for heavy-duty use (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling) or at least every 5years.

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 182

Page 184: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

183

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

DEMANDING USE OF THE CAR

Should prevailing use of the car be underone of the following specially heavy con-ditions:

❒ trailer or caravan towing;

❒ dusty roads;

❒ short distances (less than 7-8 km) re-peated and with external temperaturesbelow zero;

❒ frequently idling engines or long dis-tance low speed driving (e.g. taxis ordoor-to-door deliveries) or in case ofa long term inactivity;

❒ in cities;

perform the following inspections morefrequently than shown on the ServiceSchedule:

❒ check front disk brake pad conditionsand wear;

❒ check cleanness of locks, bonnet andboot and lever cleanness and lubrica-tion;

❒ visually inspect the conditions of: en-gine, gearbox, transmission, pipes andhoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubberparts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.);

❒ check battery charge and liquid level(electrolyte) (see paragraph “Chargelevel check” in chapter “Maintenanceand care”);

❒ visually inspect the accessory drive beltconditions;

❒ check pollen filter and replace, if re-quired;

❒ check air cleaner and replace, if re-quired.

REGULARINSPECTIONS

Every 1,000 km or before long journeys,check and top up if required:

❒ engine coolant fluid level;

❒ brake fluid level;

❒ brake fluid level;

❒ tyre pressure and conditions.

❒ operation of lights (headlights, directionindicators, hazard lights, etc.);

❒ operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system, position and wear ofthe windscreen and rear window wiperblades;

Every 3,000 km check the following andtop-up, if required:engine oil level.

You are recommended to use FL Selenia products, designed and producedspecifically for Fiat cars (see table “Ca-pacities” in section “Technical specifica-tions”).

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 183

Page 185: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

184

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

CHECKING FLUID

fig. 1 - 1.4 version

Never smoke while workingin the engine compartment.

Flammable gases may be present.Risk of fire.

WARNING

Be careful not to confuse thevarious types of fluids whiletopping up: they are all reci-procally incompatible and

may severely damage your car.F0R0243m

1. Engine coolant 2. Battery3. Windscreen washer fluid4. Brake fluid5. Engine oil6. Power steering fluid

fig. 2 - 1.4 T-JET version

2

6 4

5

13

2

6 4

5

13

2

6 4

5

13

F0R0244m

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 184

Page 186: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

185

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

fig. 4 - 1.6 Multijet version F0R0301m

fig. 3 - 1.3 Multijet version

1

1

6

2

4 5

3

F0R0235m

1. Engine oil2. Engine coolant

3. Windscreen washer fluid

4. Brake fluid

5. Battery

6. Power steering fluid

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 185

Page 187: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

186

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

If the oil level is near or even under theMIN line, add oil through the filler A toreach the MAX line.

Oil level shall never exceed the MAX line.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

The maximum engine oil consumption isusually 400 grams every 1,000 km.

When the car is new, the engine needsto run in, therefore the engine oil con-sumption can only be considered stabilisedafter the first 5,000 - 6,000 km.

IMPORTANT The oil consumption de-pends on driving style and the conditionsunder which the car is used.

IMPORTANT After adding or changingthe oil, let the engine turn over for a fewseconds and wait a few minutes after turn-ing it off before you check the level.

ENGINE OIL fig. 5-6-7-8

Check the oil level a few minutes (about5) after the engine has stopped, with thecar parked on level ground.

The oil level shall be included between theMIN and MAX marks on the dipstick B.

The range between the MIN and MAXlevels corresponds to approximately one litre of oil.

fig. 5 - 1.4 version F0R0134m fig. 7 - 1.3 Multijet version F0R0135m

Proceed very carefully insidethe engine compartment

when the engine is hot: risk of burns.Remember that the fan may start upif the engine is hot: risk of injury. Payattention to scarves, ties and otherloose fitting garments: they could getdragged by the moving parts.

WARNING

fig. 6 - 1.4 T-JET version F0R0245m fig. 8 - 1.6 Multijet version F0R0302m

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 186

Page 188: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

187

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

WINDSCREEN WASHINGFLUID fig. 10

To top up, remove the cap A.

Pour a mixture of water and TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35, in the fol-lowing concentrations:

30% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 and 70% water in summer.

50% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 and 50% water in winter.

In case of temperatures below –20°C, useundiluted TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 fluid.

ENGINE COOLANT fig. 9

The coolant level must be checked whenthe engine is cold and must be betweenthe MIN and MAX lines on the vessel.

fig. 9 F0R0136m fig. 10

PARAFLU UP antifreeze isused in the engine cooling sys-tem. Use fluid of the sametype contained in the cooling

system for top-ups. PARAFLU UP maynot be mixed with other types of fluids.If this accidentally occurs, do not startthe engine and contact a Fiat Dealer-ship.

The cooling system is pres-surised. If required, replace

the cap with an original spare part soas not to compromise system effi-ciency. Do not remove the cap fromthe vessel when the engine is hot: riskof burns.

WARNING

If the level is low, slowly pour a 50% mix-ture of demineralised water and FL Sele-nia PARAFLU UP through filler A of thevessel until the level approaches the MAXline.

The 50% concentration of PARAFLU UPdemineralised water protects from freez-ing to a temperature of –35°C.

For particularly hard climate conditions, werecommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UPand 40% demineralized water mixture.

Waste engine oil and oil filterscontains substances which aredangerous for the environ-ment. It is advisable to have

oil and filters changed by a Fiat Deal-ership where they will be disposed ofaccording to the law.

Always top up using engine oilof the same types as that al-ready in the engine.

F0R0137m

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 187

Page 189: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

188

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

NOTE Carefully clean the cap of reservoirA and the surrounding surface.

When opening the cap, make sure that nodirt gets into the reservoir.

For topping up always use a funnel withbuilt in filter (mesh smaller than or equalto 0.12 mm).

IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbs mois-ture. For this reason, if the car is mainlyused in areas with a high degree of at-mospheric humidity, the fluid should bereplaced at more frequent intervals thanspecified in the “Service schedule”.

Check level through the reservoir.

fig. 11 F0R0138m

Do not travel with the wind-screen washing reservoir

empty: the windscreen washer is fun-damental to improve visibility.

WARNING

Some commercial wind-screen washer additives are

flammable. The engine compartmentcontains hot parts which could starta fire if they come into contact.

WARNING

Prevent brake fluid which ishighly corrosive from cominginto contact with paintedparts. Wash with water im-

mediately if this should happen.

BRAKE FLUID fig. 11

Release cap A: check that the liquid con-tained in the tank is at the maximum level.

Fluid level in the reservoir must not ex-ceed the MAX mark.

Use the brake fluid shown in the “Fluidsand lubricants” table (see “Technical Spec-ifications”).

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 188

Page 190: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

189

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

Brake fluid is poisonous andhighly corrosive. In the case

of accidental contact, wash the partswith water and mild soap and rinsewith plenty of water. Call a doctorimmediately if swallowed.

WARNING

Symbol π on the contain in-dicates a synthetic brake flu-

id, which is different from a mineralfluid. Use of a mineral type fluid willdamage the special rubber seals ofthe braking system beyond repair.

WARNINGPOWER STEERING FLUID fig. 12

Check that the oil level with the car on flatground and the engine cold is between theMIN and MAX lines on the reservoirbody. The level may go over the MAXline when the oil is hot.If topping up is required, make sure the oilyou used has the same specifications asthat already in the system.

fig. 12 - 1.4 T-JET version F0R0139m

Oil consumption is extremelylow; if another top-up shouldbe required after only a short

period of time, have the system checkedfor leakage at a Fiat Dealership.

Prevent power steering flu-id from coming into contact

with hot engine parts: the liquid isflammable.

WARNING

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 189

Page 191: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

190

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

BATTERY

The car fits a low-maintenance battery: notop-ups with distilled water are needed innormal conditions of use.

CHECKING THE CHARGE fig. 13

Use the gauge A (where provided) on thebattery lid positioned as shown in fig. 13and take action according to the colour itassumes.

Refer to the table below.

AIR CLEANER

Have the air cleaner replaced by a FiatDealership.

POLLEN FILTER

Have the pollen filter replaced by a FiatDealership.

Brilliant white Top-up Go to a Fiat Dealership

Dark without green Low charge Recharge the battery area in the middle (go to a Fiat Dealership)

Dark with green Electrolyte and charge OK No action needed area in the middle

fig. 13 F0R0140m

IMPORTANT If the battery is not pro-vided with the visual indicator to verifyelectrolyte charge and level, control op-erations and any top-up operation mustbe carried out by specialised personneland by Fiat Dealership.

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 190

Page 192: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

191

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

CHANGING THE BATTERY

If required, replace the battery with a gen-uine spare part having the same specifi-cations.If a battery with different specifications isfitted, the service intervals given in the“Service schedule” in this section will nolonger apply.Follow the battery manufacturer’s in-structions for maintenance.IMPORTANT Check the battery chargeonce a year, preferably before the begin-ning to winter, to prevent freezing of theelectrolyte. Perform this inspection morefrequently if the car is mainly used forshort distances or if electrical devices run-ning with the key off are installed, partic-ularly after-market.

Incorrect assembly of electricand electronic devices maycause severe damage to yourcar. Go to a Fiat Dealership if

you want to install accessories (alarms,mobile phone, etc.): they will suggestthe most suitable devices and adviseyou if a higher capacity battery needsto be installed.

Batteries contain very dan-gerous substances for the en-vironment. You are recom-mended to go to a Fiat Deal-

ership to have the battery replacedwhere the old battery will be disposedof respecting both the environment andthe laws in force.

If the car is left for long peri-ods in very cold environ-

ments, remove the battery and store itin a warm place to prevent freezing.

WARNING

Battery liquid is poisonousand corrosive. Avoid contact

with the skin and eyes. Keep nakedflames and sources of sparks awayfrom the battery: risk of fire and ex-plosion.

WARNING

Running the battery with anexcessively low liquid level

will damage the battery beyond re-pair and even cause an explosion.

WARNING

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 191

Page 193: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

192

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

The total intake of these systems (facto-ry and after-market) must be less than 0.6mA x Ah (of the battery) as shown in thefollowing table:

Battery Maximumpermissible

loadless consumption

40 Ah 24 mA

50 Ah 30 mA

60 Ah 36 mA

IMPORTANT A battery which is kept ata charge of less than 50% (optical indica-tor with dark colour without green areain the middle) for any length of time willbe damaged by sulphation leading to a re-duction in cranking power.

The battery will also be more at risk offreezing (e.g. already at -10°C). Refer tothe paragraph “Car inactivity” in “Startingand driving” if the car is left parked for along time.

If after buying the car, you want to installelectric accessories which require per-manent electric supply (alarm, etc.) con-tact Fiat Dealership whose qualified per-sonnel, in addition to suggesting the mostsuitable devices, will evaluate the overallelectric absorption, checking whether thecar’s electric system is capable of with-standing the load required, or whether itshould be integrated with a more power-ful battery.

Since these devices continue absorbing en-ergy even when the ignition key is off, theygradually run down the battery.

USEFUL ADVICE FORLENGTHENING THE LIFE OFYOUR BATTERY

To avoid draining your battery and length-en its life, observe the following indica-tions:

❒ when you park the car, ensure thedoors, tailgate and bonnet are closedproperly;

❒ switch off all lights inside the car: thecar is however equipped with a systemwhich switches all internal lights off au-tomatically;

❒ do not keep accessories (e.g. sound sys-tem, hazard lights, etc.) switched on fora long time when the engine is not run-ning;

❒ before performing any operation on theelectrical system, disconnect the bat-tery negative cable;

❒ make sure that battery terminals are al-ways be perfectly tight.

Always wear the proper pro-tective eyewear when work-

ing on the battery or near it.

WARNING

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 192

Page 194: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

193

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

WHEELS AND TYRES

Check the pressure of each type, includ-ing the spare, approximately once everytwo weeks and before starting a long jour-ney: this check must be performed withthe tyre rested and cold.

It is normal for pressure to increase whenthe car is used. For the correct tyre in-flation pressure, see “Wheels” in “Tech-nical specifications” section.

Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear fig. 14:

A normal pressure: evenly worn tread.

B low pressure: tread particularly wornon the edges.

C excessive pressure: tread particularlyworn in the middle.

The tyres must be replaced when thetread is less than 1.6 mm thick. In all cas-es, follow the laws in force in the coun-try where you are driving.

fig. 14 F0R0141m

IMPORTANT NOTES

❒ Avoid braking suddenly, burning startsand violent knocks against the curb,potholes or other obstacles if possible.Long distances on rough roads maydamage the tyres;

❒ check the tyres regularly for cuts on thesides, swelling or irregular tread wear.Go to a Fiat Dealership if required.

❒ do not over load your car: this maycause serious damage to wheels andtyres;

❒ if a tyre is punctured, stop immediate-ly and charge it to avoid damage to thetyre, the rim, suspensions and steeringsystem;

❒ a tyre will age even if it is not usedmuch. Cracks in the tread and on thesidewalls are a sign of ageing. Have thetyres checked by specialised personnelif they have been fitted for longer than6 years. Remember to check the sparewheel very carefully;

❒ In the case of replacement, always fitnew tyres, avoiding those of dubiousorigin;

❒ If a tyre is changed, also change the in-flation valve;

❒ to allow even wear between the frontand rear tyres, it is advisable to changethem over every 10-15 thousand kilo-metres, keeping them on the same sideof the car so as not to reverse the di-rection of rotation.

Remember that the roadholding qualities of your car

also depends on the correct inflationpressure of the tyres.

WARNING

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 193

Page 195: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

194

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

WINDSCREEN WIPER

BLADES

Periodically clean the rubber part usingspecial products; TUTELA PROFES-SIONAL SC 35 is recommended.

Replace the blades if the rubber edge isdeformed or worn. In all cases, it is ad-visable to replace them approximatelyonce a year.

A few simple precautions can reduce thepossibility of damage to the blades:

❒ make sure that the rubber part is notstuck to the windscreen at sub-zerotemperatures. Use an antifreeze prod-uct to release it if required.

❒ remove the snow from the window:this will avoid overstressing the elec-trical motor in addition to protectingthe blades;

❒ do not operate the windscreen wiperson dry glass.

Driving with worn wiperblades is a serious hazard,

because visibility is reduced in badweather.

WARNING

RUBBER HOSES

Carefully follow the information containedin the “Service schedule” in this sectionfor maintenance of brake system and fuelfeed rubber hoses.

Ozone, high temperatures and prolongedlack of fluid in the system may cause hard-ening and cracking of the hoses, with pos-sible leaks. Careful inspections are there-fore necessary.

Excessively low pressure willcause overheating of the

tyre and may cause severe tyre dam-age.

WARNING

Do not exchange the tyresfrom the left to the right of

the car and vice versa.

WARNING

Do not repaint alloy wheelrims at temperatures higher

than 150°C. The mechanical featuresof the wheels could be compromised.

WARNING

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 194

Page 196: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

195

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

Replacing the windscreen wiperblades fig. 15

How to remove the blade:

❒ raise the windscreen wiper arm A fromthe windscreen;

❒ turn blade B 90° around pin C, locat-ed at the end of the wiper arm;

❒ press the blade locking tabs;

❒ remove the blade from pin C.

fig. 15 F0R0236m

SPRAY NOZZLES

Windscreen washer fig. 16

If there is no jet of fluid, firstly check thatthere is fluid in the reservoir: see “Check-ing fluid levels” in this section).

Then check that the nozzle holes are notclogged, if necessary using a needle.

The windscreen jets are directed by ad-justing the angle of the nozzles.

Fluid jets shall be directed at about 1/3

height from the window upper edge.

fig. 16 F0R0143m

How to insert the blade:

❒ insert the blade fastening tabs in thehole on the end of the arm;

❒ refit the arm with the blade on thewindscreen.

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 195

Page 197: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

196

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

BODY AND UNDERBODY WARRANTY

Your car is covered by warranty againstperforation due to rust of any original el-ement of the structure or body.

For the general terms of this warranty, re-fer to Fiat Warranty Booklet.

BODYWORK

PROTECTION FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS

The main causes of corrosion are the fol-lowing:

❒ atmospheric pollution;

❒ salty air and humidity (coastal areas, orhot humid climates);

❒ seasonal environment conditions.

Not to be underestimated is also the abra-sive action of wind-borne atmosphericdust and sand and mud and gravel raisedby other cars.

On your car, Fiat implemented the bestmanufacturing technologies to effectivelyprotect the bodywork against corrosion.

These are the most important:

❒ paint products and systems which givethe car particular resistance to corro-sion and abrasion;

❒ use of galvanised (or pre-treated) steelsheets, with high resistance to corro-sion;

❒ spraying the underbody, engine com-partment, wheelhouse internal partsand other parts with highly protectivewax products;

❒ spraying of plastic materials for pro-tective purposes in the most exposedpoints: under the doors, inside themudguard, along the edges, etc.

❒ use of “open” boxed sections to pre-vent condensation and pockets of mois-ture from triggering rust inside.

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 196

Page 198: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

197

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

ADVICE FOR PRESERVINGTHE BODYWORK

Paint

Paintwork does not only serve an aes-thetic purpose, but also protects the un-derlying sheet metal.

Touch up abrasions and scratches immedi-ately to prevent the formation of rust. On-ly use genuine spare paint products fortouch-ups (see “Bodywork paint identifi-cation plate” in the “Technical Specifica-tions” section).

Normal maintenance of paintwork consistsin washing the car: the frequency dependson the conditions and environment wherethe car is used. For example, it is advisableto wash the car more often in areas witha high environmental pollution or on roadssprinkled with salt.

To correctly wash the car:

❒ remove the aerial from the roof to pre-vent damage to it if the car is washed inan automatic system;

❒ wash the body using a low pressure jetof water;

❒ wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy so-lution over the bodywork, frequentlyrinsing with the sponge;

❒ rinse well with water and dry with a jetof air or a chamois leather.

Dry the parts less in sight particularly care-fully, such as the door frames and theheadlight frames, where water may stag-nate more easily. It is a good idea to leavethe car in the open for a while after wash-ing it to give time for the water to evap-orate.

Do not wash the car after it has beenparked in the sun or when the engine isbonnet is hot: this could take the shine offthe paint.

Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned inthe same way as the rest of the car.

Where possible, do not park under trees;the resinous substance many species re-lease give the paint a dull appearance andincrease the possibility of triggering rustprocesses.

IMPORTANT Bird droppings must bewashed off immediately and thoroughly asthe acid they contain is particularly ag-gressive.

Detergents cause water pollu-tion. The car should be washedin areas equipped for collect-ing and purifying the liquid

used in the washing process.

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 197

Page 199: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

198

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

Windows

Use specific window cleaner products.

Use also clean cloths to avoid scratchingthe glass or damaging the transparency.

IMPORTANT The inside of the rear win-dow should be wiped gently with a clothin the direction of the filaments to avoiddamaging the heating device.

Engine compartment

Wash the engine compartment carefullyafter the end of the winter. Be careful notto direct the jet of water onto electroniccontrol units. Adequately protect the up-per air vents to prevent damage to thewindscreen wiper motor. Have this op-eration performed at a specialised work-shop.

IMPORTANT Perform this operation ona cold engine and with the key at STOP.After the washing operation, make surethat the various protections (e.g. rubbercaps and guards) have not removed ordamaged.

Never use flammable prod-ucts, such as petrol ether or

rectified petrol to clean inside the car.The electrostatic charges which aregenerated by rubbing during thecleaning operation may cause a fire.

WARNING

INTERIORS

Periodically check that water is nottrapped under the mats (due to waterdripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.) whichcould cause oxidisation of the sheet metal.

Front headlights

IMPORTANT Never use aromatic sub-stances (e.g.: petrol) or ketenes (e.g.: ace-tone) for cleaning front headlight plasticlens.

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 198

Page 200: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

199

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

The fabric upholstery of yourcar is designed to withstandthe normal wear and tear ofyour car for a long time. Some

precautions are however needed. Avoidprolonged rubbing against clothing ac-cessories, such as metal buckles, Velcrostrips and the like, which by applying ahigh pressure on the fabric in a smallarea could cause the breakage of somethreads and damage the upholstery.

CLEANING SEATS AND FABRICPARTS

Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacu-um cleaner. It is advisable to use a moistbrush on velvet upholstery.

Rub the seats with a sponge moistenedwith a solution of water and neutral de-tergent.

Do not keep aerosol cans inthe car: risk of explosion.

Aerosol cans must not be exposed totemperatures higher than 50°C. Thetemperature may raise well beyondthat figure when the car is left in thesun.

WARNING INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS

It is advisable to clean interior parts with amoist cloth and a solution of water and mildsoap. Use specific products for cleaning plas-tic, without solvents and specifically de-signed to prevent damage to the appearanceand colour of the treated parts to removegrease and tough stains.

IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petro-leum to clean the instrument panel.

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 199

Page 201: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

200

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

GENUINE LEATHER STEERINGWHEEL/GEAR LEVER KNOB

These components must be cleaned withmild soap and water only.

Never use spirit and/or alcohol basedproducts.

Before using off-the-shelves products de-signed for cleaning car interiors, make surethat they do not contain spirit and/or al-cohol based substances before using them.

If window cleaner accidentally drips ontothe steering wheel or gear lever knob,wipe away immediately and then wash theconcerned area with mild soap and water.

IMPORTANT Be carefully when arranginga steering wheel lock device, where applic-able, to prevent damaging the leather up-holstery by rubbing.

177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 200

Page 202: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

201

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

IDENTIFICATION DATA ................................................. 202

ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS............... 204

ENGINE .................................................................................. 205

FUEL FEED/IGNITION ....................................................... 206

TRANSMISSION .................................................................. 207

BRAKES ................................................................................... 207

SUSPENSIONS....................................................................... 208

STEERING............................................................................... 208

WHEELS .................................................................................. 209

DIMENSIONS......................................................................... 213

PERFORMANCE ................................................................... 214

WEIGHTS ............................................................................... 215

CAPACITIES........................................................................... 216

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.............................................. 217

FUEL CONSUMPTION....................................................... 219

CO2 EMISSIONS .................................................................. 221

TTTEECCHHNNIICCAALL SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 201

Page 203: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

202

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

MODEL PLATE fig. 1

This is applied to the right-hand side of thespare wheel shelf and shows the followingdata:

B Homologation number.

C Vehicle type code.

D Chassis number.

E Maximum vehicle weight fully loaded.

F Maximum vehicle weight fully loadedwith trailer.

G Maximum vehicle weight on front axle.

H Maximum vehicle weight on rear axle.

I Engine type.

L Body version code.

M Spare part code.

N Smoke opacity index (for diesel en-gines).

IDENTIFICATION DATA

Take note of the identification codes. Thefollowing identification codes are printedand shown on the plates:

❒ Model plate.

❒ Chassis marking.

❒ Bodywork paint identification plate.

❒ Engine marking.fig. 1 F0R0247m

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 202

Page 204: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

203

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

CHASSIS MARKING fig. 3

This is printed on the passegner com-partment floor bed near the front rightseat.

❒ car model (ZFA 323000);

❒ chassis number.

ENGINE MARKING

Engine marking is stamped on the cylinderblock and includes the model and thechassis number.

BODYWORK PAINTIDENTIFICATION PLATE fig. 2

This plate is applied to the tailgate andshows the following data:

A Paint manufacturer.

B Colour name.

C Fiat colour code.

D Respray and touch up code.

fig. 2 F0R0145m fig. 3 F0R0146m

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 203

Page 205: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

204

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS

Versions Engine type code Bodywork version code

1.4 350A1000 323AXA1A 00

1.4 T-JET 198A4000 323AXC1A 03

1.3 Multijet 199A3000 323AXB1A 01

1.6 Multijet 198A3000 323AXF1A 06

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 204

Page 206: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

205

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

ENGINE

GENERAL

Engine code

Cycle

Number and layout of cylinders

Piston bore and stroke mm

Total displacement cm3

Compression ratio

Maximum power (EEC) kWHP

corresponding ratio rpm

Maximum torque (EEC) Nmkgm

corresponding ratio rpm

Spark plugs

Fuel

1.4

350A1000

Otto

4 in line

72 x 84

1368

11.1 ± 0.2

5777

6000

11511.73000

NGK ZKR7A-10

Unleaded petrol 95RON

(EN228 Specifications)

1.4 T-JET

198A4000

Otto

4 in line

72,0 x 84,0

1368

9.8

881205000

20621

1750

NGK IKR9F8

Unleaded petrol 95RON

(EN228 Specifications)

1.3 Multijet

199A3000

Diesel

4 in line

69.6 x 82

1248

17.6 ± 0.4

6690

4000

20020.31750

Diesel fuel for motorvehicles

(EN590 specifications)

1.6 Multijet

198A3000

Diesel

4 in line

79.5 x 80.5

1598

16.5 ± 0.4

771054000

29029.61500

Diesel fuel for motorvehicles

(EN590 specifications)

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 205

Page 207: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

206

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

Modifications or repairs to the fuel feed system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system’stechnical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

WARNING

Fuel feedMultipoint electronic injection Multipoint sequential phased

electronic injection with turbosupercharger and intercooler

Multijet direct injection “Common Rail”

FUEL FEED/IGNITION

1.4 - 1.6 - 1.8 1.4 T-JET 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 206

Page 208: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

207

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

TRANSMISSION

1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet 1.6 Multijet

Gearbox Five forward gears plus reverse Six forward gears plus reverse with synchronisers for forward gears with synchronisers for forward gears

Clutch Self-adjusting with pedal without idle stroke Self-adjusting with pedal without idle stroke

Drive Front Front

BRAKES

1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet

Service brakes:

– front

– rear

Parking brake

IMPORTANT Water, ice and salt sprinkled on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.

controlled by hand lever, operating on rear brakes

drum / disk (T-JET version and 1.6 Multijet)

disk

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 207

Page 209: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

208

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSSUSPENSIONS

1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet

Front

Rear

Mc Pherson independent wheels

twisting axle with interconnected wheels

STEERING

1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet

Type

Steering circle (kerb to kerb) m 10.5 (❏) / 11 ( )

(❏) With 15” tyres( ) With 16” and 17” tyres

rack and pinion with hydraulic power steering

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 208

Page 210: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

209

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

READING TYRE MARKINGS fig. 4

Example: 185/65 R 15 88T

185 = Nominal width (S, distance in mmbetween sidewalls).

65 = Height/width ratio (H/S) in per-centage.

R = Radial tyre.

15 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø).

88 = Load rate (capacity).

T = Maximum speed rating.

WHEELS

RIMS AND TYRES

Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless ra-dial carcass tyres. All approved tyres arelisted in the Log Book.

IMPORTANT In the event of discrepan-cies between the information provided onthis “Owner’s handbook” and the “Logbook”, consider the specifications shownin the log book only.

Respect the prescribed size to ensuresafety of the car in movement. Fit tyresof the same make and type on all wheels.

IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubeswith Tubeless tyres.

fig. 4 F0R0147m

SPARE WHEEL

Pressed steel rim Tubeless tyre.

WHEEL GEOMETRY

Toe-in total front: 0.3 ± 1 mm

Toe-in total rear: 1.7 ± 0.5 mm

The values refer to the car in running or-der.

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 209

Page 211: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

210

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSREADING RIM MARKINGS fig. 4

Example: 6J x 15 ET44

6 = rim width in inches 1.

J = rim drop centre outline (sideprojection where the tyre beadrests) 2.

15 = rim nominal diameter in inches(corresponds to diameter of thetyre to be mounted) 3 = Ø.

ET44 = wheel camber angle (distance be-tween the disc/rim supportingplane and the wheel rim centreline).

Load rating (capacity)

70 = 335 kg 81 = 462 kg

71 = 345 kg 82 = 475 kg

72 = 355 kg 83 = 487 kg

73 = 365 kg 84 = 500 kg

74 = 375 kg 85 = 515 kg

75 = 387 kg 86 = 530 kg

76 = 400 kg 87 = 545 kg

77 = 412 kg 88 = 560 kg

78 = 425 kg 89 = 580 kg

79 = 437 kg 90 = 600 kg

80 = 450 kg 91 = 615 kg

Maximum speed rating

Q = up to 160 km/h.

R = up to 170 km/h.

S = up to 180 km/h.

T = up to 190 km/h.

?U= up to 200 km/h.

H = up to 210 km/h.

V = up to 240 km/h.

Maximum speed ratingfor snow tyres

QM + S = up to 160 km/h.

TM + S = up to 190 km/h.

HM + S = up to 210 km/h.

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 210

Page 212: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

211

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

6J X 15” - ET 44

6J X 15” - ET 44

6J X 15” - ET 44

6J X 15” - ET 44

6J X 15” - ET 44

185/65 R15 84T195/60 R15 88H

185/65 R15 84T (**)

185/65 R15 84T195/60 R15 88H

185/65 R15 84T (**)

185/65 R15 84T (**)

185/65 R15 84T195/60 R15 88H (❏)

195/55 R16 87H (❍)

185/65 R15 84T195/60 R15 88H (❏)

195/55 R16 87H (❍)

205/45 R17 88V (*) (▲)

6J X 15” - ET 44

6J X 16” - ET 41

6J X 15” - ET 44

6J X 16” - ET 41

6.5J X 17” - ET 41

Version Rims Tyres fitted Spare wheel (where provided)Rim Tyre

(❏) Alloy rim

(❍) Optional alloy rim for versions/markets where provided

(*) Not snow chains

(▲)Optional tyre for versions/markets where provided

(**) Using this spare wheel, vehicle max speed is 80 km/h

1.4 T-JET1.3 Multijet1.6 Multijet

1.4

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 211

Page 213: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

212

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSCOLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)

Tyre Medium load Full load Front Rear Front Rear

185/65 R15 84T 2.3 2.1 2.3 2.3

195/60 R15 88H 2.3 2.1 2.3 2.3

195/55 R16 87H 2.3 2.1 2.4 2.4

205/45 R17 88V 2.4 2.2 2.5 2.4

Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 212

Page 214: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

213

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

DIMENSIONS

Dimensions are expressed in mm and re-fer to the vehicle fitted with standardtyres.

The height refers to the unladen vehicle.

Boot volume

Unladen boot volume (V.D.A. standards) ...................... 500 dm3

Boot capacity with rear seat folded..................................... 870 dm3

fig. 5 F0R0237m

Versions A B C D E F G H

1.4 - 1.3 Multijet4560 928 2603 1029 1494/1487 (*) 1467/1471 (❏) 1946.21 1482.5/1483.5 (❏)1.4 T-JET

1.6 Multijet

IMPORTANT Track measurements may vary according to rim/tyre size.(*) With lower trim for versions/markets where provided (❏) Full load

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 213

Page 215: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

214

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSPERFORMANCE

Top admitted speed after initial car use in km/h.

1.4 1.4 T-JET 1.3 Multijet 1.6 Multijet

165 195 170 190

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 214

Page 216: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

215

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

1160

500

10009001660

1200500

75

70

WEIGHTS

Weights (kg) 1.4 1.4 T-JET 1.3 Multijet 1.6 Multijet

Unladen weight (with all liquids, fuel tank filled to 90 % and without optional equipment):

Payload (*) including the driver:

Maximum admitted loads (**)– front axle:– rear axle:– total:

Towable loads– trailer with brakes:– trailer without brakes:

Maximum load on roof:

Maximum load on tow hitch(trailer with brakes):

(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads in the boot and/or on the roof so that they comply

with these limits.

1200

500

10009001670

1200500

75

70

1185

500

10009001685

1200500

75

70

1290

500

10009001790

1200500

75

70

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 215

Page 217: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

216

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSCAPACITIES

Fuel tank: litresincluding a reserve of: litres

Fuel tank: litresincluding a reserve of: litres

Cooling system engine: litres

Engine sump: litres Engine sump and filter: litres

Engine sump: litresEngine sump and filter: litres

Gearbox/differential casing: kg

Power steering: kg

Hydraulic brake circuit: kg

Windscreen washer reservoir: litres

(*) Versions with ABS

(❒) For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralized water mixture.

1.6 Multijet

455 ÷ 7

6.3

––

4.34.6

2.0 (❍)

0.9

0.4 / 0.5 (*)

3

1.4T-JET

455 ÷ 7

––

6

2.752.9

––

1.7 (▲)

0.9

0.46 / 0.56 (*)

3

1.3 Multijet

––

455 ÷ 7

7.1

––

3.03.2

1,7 (▲)

0.9

0.4 / 0.5 (*)

3

1.4

455 ÷ 7

––

5.8

2.42.6

––

1.5 (▲)

0.9

0.4 / 0.5 (*)

3

Specified fuels and genuine lubricants

Unleaded petrol with no less than95 R.O.N. (EN 228 Specification)

Diesel fuel for motor vehicles (EN590 Specification)

Mixture of 50% demineralised water and 50% PARAFLU UP (❒)

SELENIA K P.E.

SELENIA WR

TUTELA CAR TECHNYX (▲)TUTELA CAR MATRYX (❍)

TUTELA GI/A

TUTELA TOP 4

Mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 216

Page 218: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

217

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

According to Service Schedule

According to Service Schedule

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND SPECIFICATIONS

Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Genuine fluids and Changingfor correct car operation lubricants frequency

Lubricants forpetrol engines

Lubricants for diesel engines

For diesel engines, in the event of emergencies when genuine products are not available, lubricants providing at least ACEA B4performance are allowed; in that case, engine best performance is not guaranteed; we recommend to have it replaced as soon aspossible with the recommended lubricants by the Fiat Dealership.The use of products with specifications below ACEA A3/B3 standards for petrol engines and ACEA B4 standards for diesel enginescould cause damage to the engine not covered under the warranty.

SAE 5W-40 ACEA A3/B3 grade totally synthetic lubricant. Qualification FIAT 9.55535-M2

Synthetic base lubricants SAE 5W-40 grade. Qualification FIAT 9.55535-N2

SELENIA K Contractual TechnicalReference N° F214.I05

SELENIA WRContractual TechnicalReference N° F515.D06

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 217

Page 219: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

218

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

Lubricants and greases for transmission

Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Original fluids and Applicationsfor correct car operation lubricants

(*) IMPORTANT Do not top up or mix with fluids having characteristics different from those specified.When the vehicle is used under particularly harsh climate conditions, we recommend using a 60-40 mixture of PARAFLU UP and demineralised water.

LSynthetic-based oils, grade SAE 75W- 85.Qualification FIAT 9.55550-MX3

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-85.Qualification FIAT 9.55550-MX3

Lubricant for automatic transmissions.Qualification FIAT 9.55550-AG1.NLGI 1-2 consistency.Grease containing Molybdenum bisulphide for high temperature appliances. Qualification FIAT 9.55580N.L.G.I. 1-2 consistency

Specifc grease to be used for constant-velocity joints withlow friction coefficient. Qualification FIAT 9.55580N.L.G.I. 0-1 consistency.

Synthetic fluid FMVSS no. 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925 SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956- 01.Qualification FIAT 9.55597

Protective with antifreeze action, red colour based on inhibited monoethylen glycol and organic formula,that passes CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications.Qualification FIAT 9.55523

Additive for diesel fuels with protective action for Diesel engines.

Mixture of alcohol, water and surfactants CUNA NC 956-II.Qualification FIAT 9.55522

TUTELA CAR MATRIXContractual TechnicalReference N° F108.F02

TUTELA CARTECHNYXContractual TechnicalReference N° F010.B05

TUTELA GI/AContractual Technical Reference N° F002.B92

TUTELA ALL STARContractual TechnicalReference N° F702.G07

TUTELA STAR 700Contractual TechnicalReference N° F701.C07

TUTELA TOP 4Contractual TechnicalReference N° F001.A93

PARAFLU UPContractual TechnicalReference N° F101.M01

TUTELA DIESEL ARTContractual TechnicalReference N°F601.L06

TUTELA PROFES-SIONAL SC 35Contractual TechnicalReference N° F201.D02

Mechanical gearbox anddifferential (1.3 MultijetDualogic and 1.6 Multijet versions)

Mechanical gearbox and differential (petrol and 1.3 Multijetversions)

Hydraulic power steering

CV joints on wheel side

CV joints on differentialside

Brake and clutch hydraulic controls

Radiator antifreeze proportion: 50% water and50% PARAFLU UP

To be mixed with diesel fuel(25 cc per 10 litres)

To be used diluted orundiluted in windscreen/rear window washer/wiper systems

Brake fluids

Protective agent forradiators

Windscreen/ rearwindow washer fluid

Fuel additivel

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 218

Page 220: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

219

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

❒ extra-urban cycle: frequent accelerat-ing in all gears, simulating extraurbanuse of the car: speed varies between 0and 120 km/h;

❒ combined consumption: calculatedweighing about 37% of urban cycle con-sumption and about 63% of extraurbanconsumption.

FUELCONSUMPTION

The fuel consumption figures given in thetable below are determined on the basisof the homologation tests set down byspecific European Directives.

The procedures below are followed formeasuring consumption:

❒ urban cycle: cold starting followed bydriving that simulates urban use of thecar;

IMPORTANT The type of route, trafficsituations, weather conditions, drivingstyle, general conditions of the car, trimlevel/equipment/accessories, load, climatecontrol system, roof rack, other situationsthat affect air drag may lead to differentfuel consumption levels than those mea-sured.

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 219

Page 221: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

220

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSFuel consumption according to Directive 2004/3/EC (litres x 100 km)

Versions Urban Extra-urban Combined

1.4 8.2 5.1 6.3

1.4 T-JET 9.2 5.2 6.7

1.3 Multijet 6.5 4.0 4.9

1.6 Multijet 6.4 4.2 5.0

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 220

Page 222: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

221

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

CO2 EMISSIONS

The CO2 emission levels at the exhaust given in the following tables refer to combined consumption.

Versions CO2 emissions according to 2004/3/EC Directive (g/km)

1.4 148

1.4 T-JET 157

1.3 Multijet 129

1.6 Multijet 131

201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 221

Page 223: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

222

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YCA

RMA

INTE

NANC

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

Boot........................................................ 86– extension ........................................ 87– opening/closing the tailgate......... 86– emergency opening....................... 83

Boot light ............................................... 74Brake assist .......................................... 92Brakes

– fluid level ........................................ 188– technical data ................................ 207

Bulb (replacement)– general instructions ..................... 158– types of bulbs ................................ 158

Capacities ............................................ 106Car inactivity ....................................... 132Car maintenance

– periodical checks........................... 183– scheduled servicing ...................... 178– service schedule ................... 179-181– use of the car under heavy conditions................................ 183

Card box - CD box............................. 72Carrying children safely ..................... 109Ceiling lights.......................................... 72

– boot light ....................................... 66– courtesy ......................................... 66

– front ................................................ 64– puddle/door .................................. 74– rear ................................................. 65

Central console oddmentcompartment ..................................... 71

Chassis (marking) ............................... 203Checking fluid ....................................... 184Child lock .............................................. 83Child restraint systems

– “Universal Isofix” ......................... 114– Passenger’s seat compliance ...... 115

Cigar lighter .......................................... 80Clutch ................................................... 207CO2 emissions...................................... 221Code Card ........................................... 6Consumption

– engine oil ........................................ 186– fuel ................................................... 219

Controls ................................................ 75Correct use of the car ...................... 127Cruise Control..................................... 70Courtesy lights ..................................... 74

– bulb replacement .......................... 174– control button .............................. 74

Current outlet...................................... 73

ABS system.......................................... 92Accessories purchased

by the owner .................................... 100Additional heater ................................. 56Air bag

– front................................................. 115– side .................................................. 118

Air cleaner............................................. 190Adjustable Air vents ........................... 50Alarm...................................................... 11Armrest ................................................. 79Ashtray................................................... 80ASR system ........................................... 95

– activation/deactivation ................. 95At the filling station ............................ 101Automatic climate

control system .................................. 59

Battery– checking the charge ..................... 190– jump starting ................................. 146– recharging ...................................... 185– replacing ......................................... 191

Bodywork– maintenance .................................. 196– version codes ............................... 204

Bonnet .................................................. 88

IIINNDDEEXX

222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 222

Page 224: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

223

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE V

EHICL

EIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YVE

HICL

EMA

INTE

NANC

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

EOBD system ...................................... 96ESP system ............................................ 93External lights ...................................... 66

Fiat CODE system ............................. 6Fix & Go automatic ............................ 153Flashing the headlights ....................... 66Fluid levels ............................................ 184Fluids and lubricants ........................... 217Follow me home (device) ................. 67Front ceiling lights

– bulb replacement........................... 165– control ............................................ 72

Front fog lights– bulb replacement .......................... 162– control button .............................. 75

Fuel– consumption................................... 229– cut-off switch.................................. 77– level gauge....................................... 17

Fuel cut-off switch ............................... 77Fuel filler cap ....................................... 102Fuel level gauge ................................... 17Fuses (replacement) ........................... 168

Gearbox – using manual gearbox .................. 126

Glass holder - can holder................... 72Glove box/oddment compartment.. 78

Handbrake .......................................... 125Hazard lights ........................................ 75Head restraints

– front ................................................ 45– rear ................................................... 46

Headlight washer– control ............................................ 61– fluid level ........................................ 200

Headlights.............................................. 91– beam adjustment .......................... 89– headlight slant adjusting device . 89

Heated rear window ..................... 52-57Heating and ventilation ...................... 49

Identification data .............................. 202Ignition device....................................... 13In an emergency .................................. 145Instrument panel ................................. 14Instruments .......................................... 16Interior fittings .................................... 78Interiors ................................................ 198Isofix (child restraint system) .......... 114

Jack ........................................................ 148Jacking the car ..................................... 175

Key with remote control ................ 8Key without remote control ........... 9

Dashboard ........................................... 5– Left hand drive version ............... 5

Dashboard and controls..................... 4Dead lock device ................................. 77Digital display ....................................... 18Dimensions .......................................... 213Dipped beam headlights

– control ............................................ 66– bulb replacement........................... 161

Direction indicators– control ............................................ 67– front bulb replacement ............... 161– rear bulb replacement ................. 162– side bulb replacement ................. 162

Doors ..................................................... 82

Electrical socket ................................ 73Engine

– identification code ........................ 202– marking ........................................... 203– technical data ................................ 205

Engine compartment– washing ........................................... 197

Engine coolant ...................................... 187Engine coolant temperature gauge .. 17Engine oil

– consumption .................................. 186– level check....................................... 186– specifications ................................. 227

222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 223

Page 225: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

224

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YCA

RMA

INTE

NANC

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

Pretensioners ...................................... 106Prolonged car inactivity...................... 138Protecting the environment ............. 102Puddle lights .......................................... 74

– bulb replacement .......................... 174

Radio transmitters and cellular telephones ......................................... 100

Radionavigator presetting system .... 104Rain sensor............................................ 69Rear ceiling lights

– bulb replacement........................... 165– control ............................................ 72

Rear doors emergency lock device.......................................... 79

Rear fog lights– bulb replacement .......................... 162– control button .............................. 75

Rear window washer– control ............................................ 61– fluid level ........................................ 200

Rear window wiper– blades .............................................. 207– control ............................................ 61– nozzles ............................................ 208

Rearview mirrors– door mirrors ................................. 47– driving mirror ................................ 48

Reconfigurable Multifunctional Display ................... 32

Refuelling ............................................... 101Rev. counter ......................................... 16Reversing light ..................................... 162Roof rack/ski rack .............................. 90Rubber hoses ....................................... 194

Safety ................................................... 103Seat adjustment ................................... 44Seat belts

– general instructions ..................... 107– load limiters ................................... 106– maintenance .................................. 109– using the seat belts........................ 104

Seats– adjustment ..................................... 44– cleaning ........................................... 199– tilting (rear seats) .......................... 87

Side/taillights– control ............................................ 57– front bulb replacement................. 168– rear bulb replacement .................. 170

Smart washing ..................................... 60Smoker’s kit ......................................... 72Snow chains ......................................... 131Sound system ...................................... 99

Load limiters ...................................... 106

Main beam headlights

– bulb replacement .......................... 161

– control ............................................ 66

– flashing ............................................ 66

Manual climate control system ........ 53

Multifunctional display ........................ 23

Number plate light ............................ 164

Oddment compartments.................. 78

Paint ..................................................... 195

Parking .................................................. 125

Parking sensors .................................... 97

Performance ........................................ 214

Plates

– bodywork paint

identification plate ........................... 203

– model plate .................................... 202

Pollen filter ........................................... 190

Power socket ...................................... 73

Power steering .................................... 96

Power windows .................................. 79

Presetting for mounting the

“Isofix Universal” child restraint system................................. 120

222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 224

Page 226: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

225

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE V

EHICL

EIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YVE

HICL

EMA

INTE

NANC

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

Towing trailers

– tow hook installation ................... 129

Transmission ........................................ 207

Trip computer ..................................... 42

Tyres

– replacing a wheel ........................... 147

– maintenance .................................. 193

– reading tyre markings .................. 209

– standard tyres ................................ 211

– cold tyre inflation pressure ........ 212

Using the manual gearbox .............. 126

Ventilation .......................................... 49

Warning lights and messages ......... 133

Weights ................................................ 215

Wheel..................................................... 206– replacing a wheel .................. 147-155

– spare wheel ................................... 211

– wheel geometry ............................ 209

Wheel rims

– understanding rim marking ........ 210

Window washing ................................. 68

Window winders ................................. 83

Windscreen/rear window/headlight washer fluid level ............ 200

Windscreen/rear windowwiper blades ...................................... 194

Windscreen washer– control ............................................ 68– fluid level ........................................ 187

Windscreen wiper– blades .............................................. 194– control ............................................ 68– spray nozzles ................................. 195

Spark plugs– type ................................................. 205

Speedometer ....................................... 16Starting and driving ............................ 121Starting the engine

– bump starting ................................ 147– diesel engines ................................ 123– emergency start-up ...................... 146– ignition switch ............................... 13– jump starting .................................. 146– petrol engines ............................... 122– stopping the engine ....................... 124– warm up the engine after just started.......................................... 124

Steering .................................................. 208Steering column lock ......................... 13Steering wheel ..................................... 47Sunroof .................................................. 74Sun visors ............................................. 81Suspensions .......................................... 208Symbols ................................................. 6

Tailgate ................................................ 86Technical specifications ..................... 201Third brake light ................................. 164Top speeds ........................................... 214Towing the car .................................... 175

222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 225

Page 227: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

PROVISIONS FOR THE PROCESSING OF A VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE-CYCLE

For years now Fiat has been developing its global commitment towards the safeguarding and protection of the Environment throughthe continuous improvement of its production processes and the making of increasingly more “eco friendly” products. With a viewto guaranteeing the best possible service to clients in full observance of environmental standards and in response to the obligationsimposed by European Directive 2000/53/EC on end-of-life vehicles, Fiat offers its clients the possibility to hand in their vehicle* atthe end of its life span without additional costs.

The European Directive, in fact, provides for the take-back of the vehicle without the last holder or owner of the same incurring expenses due to the fact that the market value of the vehicle is zero or negative. In particular, in almost all of the countries of the European Union, up until 1st January 2007, take-back of the vehicle free of charge only applies to vehicles registered from 1 July 2002on, while, from 2007 on, take-back will be carried out free of charge, independently of the year of registration, provided that thevehicle still contains all its essential component parts (especially engine and body) and is free from additional waste materials.

Our contracted network of authorised treatment facilities has been carefully selected in order to provide a quality service to ourcustomers by de-polluting and recycling “End of Life Vehicles” to approved environmental standards. To find out the location of yournearest authorised treatment facility, offering free of charge take-back, simply contact one of our dealers or refer to the Fiat website or call the toll free number 00800 3428 0000.

* Passenger transportation vehicles to seat a max. of nine persons, having a total admissible weight of 3.5 t

222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 226

Page 228: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

NNOOTTEESS

222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 227

Page 229: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 228

Page 230: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 229

Page 231: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 230

Page 232: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 231

Page 233: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB

Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Customer Services - Technical Services - Service Engineering - Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)Print N. 603.81.411 - 09/2008 - 2nd Edition

1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet

Tank capacity 45

Reserve 5 ÷ 7

Refuel petrol engines with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) no lower than 95 only (EN 228 Specifications)Refuel diesel engines with diesel fuel for motor vehicles only (EN 590 Specifications)

FUEL CAPACITIES (litres)

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)

Tyre Medium load Full load

Front Rear Front Rear

185/65 R15 84T 2.3 2.1 2.3 2.3

195/60 R15 88H 2.3 2.1 2.3 2.3

195/55 R16 87H 2.3 2.1 2.4 2.4

205/45 R17 88V 2.4 2.2 2.5 2.4

Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.

ENGINE OIL CHANGE1.4 1.4 T-JET 1.3 Multijet 1.6 Multijet

litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg

Engine sump and filter 2,6 – 2,4 2,6 3,2 – 4,6 –

222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 232

Page 234: 001-031 LINEA 1ed GB